202
YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual march 2004 RIVER MURRAY SOUTH AUSTRALIA

YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

YOUR WETLAND

Monitoring manual

march 2004

RIVER MURRAY SOUTH AUSTRALIA

Page 2: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

©Your Wetland: Monitoring Manual – Data Collection, 2004Department of Water Land and Biodiversity ConservationPO Box 2834Adelaide SA 5001

River Murray Catchment Water Management BoardPO Box 1374Berri SA 5343

Australian Landscape Trust PO Box 955 Renmark SA 5341

Cite as: Tucker, P (2004). Your Wetland: Monitoring Manual – Data Collection, River Murray Catchment Water ManagementBoard, Berri and Australian Landscape Trust, Renmark.

This work is subject to copyright. Graphical and textual information in this manual may be reproduced in whole or in part,provided that it is not sold or put to commercial use and its source ‘Your Wetland: Monitoring Manual’ is acknowledged.Such reproduction includes fair dealing for the use of public education, private study, research criticism or review aspermitted under the Copyright Act 1968. Reproduction for other purposes is prohibited without written permission fromthe River Murray Catchment Water Management Board and the Australian Landscape Trust.

Author:Prudence Tucker, River Murray Catchment Water Management Board/Australian Landscape Trust

Contributors:Sonia Dominelli, Mike Harper, Scott Nichols – Australian Landscape TrustIan Jolly – CSIROJack Seekamp.

Acknowledgements:Large sections of this manual – standard procedures, vegetation monitoring and mammal and reptile monitoring –have been adapted from existing monitoring guidelines developed by the Department of Environment andHeritage.1,2 These suggested techniques are based on experiences of many people within the department and the useof their ideas herein is greatly appreciated. Advice from a scientific steering committee during the setting up phase ofthe NHT funded Wetland Research and Monitoring Project assisted in developing this manual. Data sheet presentationby Kirsty England.

Developed by staff at the Australian Landscape Trust, this manual was funded by the South Australian Department ofWater, Land and Biodiversity Conservation, and the River Murray Catchment Water Management Board and wasreviewed and endorsed by the River Murray Wetland Technical Committee.

If you would like more information, two complementary documents are available:Your Wetland: Hydrology GuidelinesYour Wetland: Supporting Information.

your wetland - monitoring manualii

Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy

Page 3: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

1. INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................11.1 About this manual.......................................................................................................................21.2 Why monitor wetlands?..............................................................................................................3

Getting to know your wetland.................................................................................................3The key to adaptive management ...........................................................................................4

2. BACKGROUND ....................................................................................................................................72.1 Baseline monitoring ....................................................................................................................8

Vegetation .................................................................................................................................8Fauna........................................................................................................................................10Hydrology.................................................................................................................................10

2.2 Ongoing monitoring .................................................................................................................11Are you obeying the Golden Rules? ......................................................................................11Pre-management monitoring .................................................................................................11Are you achieving your objectives?........................................................................................11Off-target effects.....................................................................................................................12

3. YOUR MONITORING PROGRAM......................................................................................................133.1 Designing a program ................................................................................................................143.2 Protocols ....................................................................................................................................16

Consistent monitoring = accurate results ..............................................................................16Naming.....................................................................................................................................17Site description ........................................................................................................................17Data log....................................................................................................................................17

4. DATA COLLECTION TECHNIQUES.....................................................................................................194.1 Vegetation .................................................................................................................................21

Baseline monitoring ................................................................................................................24Vegetation inventory - Technique 1.......................................................................................24Photo point monitoring - Technique 2 ..................................................................................27Ongoing monitoring ...............................................................................................................29Photo point monitoring - Technique 3 ..................................................................................29Tree health assessment/photo point - Technique 4..............................................................30Fine scale vegetation monitoring -Technique 5 ....................................................................46

4.2 Groundwater ..............................................................................................................................51Baseline monitoring ................................................................................................................53Groundwater gradient monitoring – Technique 6................................................................53Ongoing monitoring ...............................................................................................................57Groundwater gradients / lens monitoring - Technique 7 .....................................................57

4.3 Surface water.............................................................................................................................61Baseline monitoring ................................................................................................................63Surface water sampling - Technique 8...................................................................................63Ongoing monitoring ...............................................................................................................65Surface water sampling - Technique 9...................................................................................65Water level monitoring - Technique 10 .................................................................................66

4.4 Fish .............................................................................................................................................69Baseline monitoring ................................................................................................................71Combination A – Technique 11 ..............................................................................................73Ongoing monitoring ...............................................................................................................75Combination B – Technique 12...............................................................................................75

your wetland - monitoring manual iii

Contents

Page 4: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

4.5 Macroinvertebrates ...................................................................................................................77Baseline monitoring ................................................................................................................80Dip net survey A – Technique 13 ............................................................................................80Ongoing monitoring ...............................................................................................................82Dip net survey B – Technique 14 ............................................................................................82

4.6 Mammals and reptiles...............................................................................................................83Baseline monitoring ................................................................................................................85Pitfalls and trapping A – Technique 15..................................................................................85Ongoing monitoring ...............................................................................................................88Pitfalls and trapping B – Technique 16 ..................................................................................88

4.7 Birds ............................................................................................................................................89Baseline monitoring ................................................................................................................91Fixed area search/historical records – Technique 17 .............................................................91Ongoing monitoring ...............................................................................................................93Fixed area search – Technique 18...........................................................................................93Colonial nesting – Technique 19.............................................................................................94

4.8 Frog monitoring ........................................................................................................................95Baseline monitoring ................................................................................................................96Recording frog calls A – Technique 20...................................................................................96Ongoing monitoring ...............................................................................................................98Recording frog calls B – Technique 21 ...................................................................................98

4.9 Adaptive monitoring and management..................................................................................99Data management and storage ..........................................................................................100Evaluating interpreting monitoring data for management ............................................100Has monitoring achieved what you set out to achieve? ...................................................100

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1: Adaptive management model .............................................................................................6Figure 2: Steps to ensure you have adequate data for assessing management objectives ..........20Figure 3: Schematic diagram showing options for quadrat layout: quadrats are

randomly allocated within a defined area in the middle of the identified zone..........49Figure 4: Schematic diagram showing quadrats parallel to the edge of the wetland..................49Figure 5: Representation of cover estimates in a 1 X 1m2 quadrat ................................................50Figure 6: Diagram showing the method for setting fyke nets in a wetland..................................72

LIST OF TABLES

Table 1: Assessing the quality of your monitoring results: What are you aiming for and what’s involved? ...............................................................15

Table 2: Example of a data log sheet for a wetland monitoring project .....................................18Table 3: References for plant identification....................................................................................23Table 4: Method used to assess tree health on River Murray floodplain, SA ...............................32Table 5: References for fish identification.......................................................................................70Table 6: Key references for identification of macroinvertebrates.................................................79Table 7: Key references for identification of mammals and reptiles ............................................84Table 8: Key references for bird identification ...............................................................................90

your wetland - monitoring manualiv

Contents

Page 5: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

APPENDICES

1 Water Regime Requirements Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

2 Designing a Monitoring Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105Table A2.1: Data for generating species area curve for Figure 1 (20m2 quadrats) 62 p 5 . . .107Figure A2.1: Species area curve 62 p 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107Table A2.2: Summary of the number of quadrats required to record plant species diversity in lower River Murray Wetlands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108Figure A2.2: Species area curves, Lake Merreti, 1999 (top) and 2001 (bottom). . . . . . . . . . .109Figure A2.3: Example of the number of sites required to adequately sample water temperature in a wetland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Figure A2.4: Monitoring frequency and timing, reflecting management . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

3 Site Description Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

4 Techniques for Surveying Vegetation in Wetlands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

5 Plant Collection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

6 Permits and Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

7 Baseline Vegetation Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

8 Photopoint Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

9 Tree Health Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

10 Fine Scale Vegetation Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153Table A10.1: Codes for classifying plant cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154Table A10.2: Codes for classifying life stage of plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

11 Soil Profile Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

12 Processing Soil Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

13 Water Quality Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

14 Water Level Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

15 Techniques for Surveying Fish Populations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

16 Fish Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170Table A16.1: Health codes for fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

17 Techniques for Surveying Macroinvertebrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

18 Macroinvertebrates Sub Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

19 Techniques for Surveying Vertebrate Fauna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

20 Techniques for Surveying Water Birds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

21 Water Bird Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

22 Frog Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

your wetland - monitoring manual v

Contents

Page 6: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manualvi

Page 7: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 1

Chapter 1: Introduction

Page 8: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Results obtained from a well-designed monitoring program are instrumental in leading wetlandexperts, managers and community groups through the evaluation stage in an ‘adaptive’ approachto management. It is therefore critical for monitoring programs to focus on parameters thatreflect your wetland objectives.

Above all, this monitoring manual highlights the complexities of a ‘well-designed’ monitoringprogram. It recognises the often conflicting influences of time, resources and the desire forinformation. With the information contained in this manual at hand, it will be easier tounderstand what the compromises are and what youare aiming for. Good luck!

1.1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL

Monitoring and evaluation are essential components of any wetland management project. Withthis in mind, Your Wetland: Monitoring Manual has been developed for wetland managers andcommunity groups as an integral part of ‘Your Wetland’ tool box, providing a guide on how toeffectively monitor your wetland.

When using this manual, it is important for wetland managers to understand what this manualdoes and doesn’t do – what aspects of wetland monitoring can be done by you, with help fromthis manual, and what elements require expert assistance.

The manual DOES include:• the steps you will need to take in setting up a monitoring program and initiating a data

collection program;• recommendations on the most suitable data collection techniques for measuring certain

parameters; and• details about how to carry out types of data collection in your wetland.

The manual DOES NOT cover:• designing and planning your own detailed wetland monitoring program; and• evaluating and interpreting the data you collect.

Each wetland is unique and therefore these elements of the monitoring process require individualassessment and expert advice. For information about where and how to obtain such input, contactany of the following:• River Murray Catchment Water Management Board, Wetland Project Officer, Berri Office on

(08) 8582 4477. The Board’s website address is www.rivermurray.sa.gov.au• Department of Water, Land and Biodiversity Conservation on (08) 8595 2048. The Department’s

website address is www.dwlbc.sa.gov.au

Techniques recommended in this document assume a relatively high level of knowledge aboutwetland flora and fauna. This is not meant to be discouraging – rather, it highlights additionalresources for training or species identification that may be required. These resources can beincluded in your wetland management and monitoring plan. Remember to seek individuals andgroups in your local community with a lot of excellent local knowledge. Take the time to findthese people and discuss your monitoring plans with them. Groups like Society for GrowingAustralian Plants (SGAP), Friends of Parks, Greening Australia, Bush Care Field Naturalists andWaterwatch, local schools or universities may be encouraged to become involved.

your wetland - monitoring manual2

‘...focus on parameters that reflectyour wetland objectives.’

CHAPTER 1: Introduction

Page 9: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

This manual is divided into four chapters.

Chapter 1: IntroductionThis chapter outlines the content of the manual, in particular outlining what is and is notcovered. It also highlights the importance of monitoring, enabling you, the wetlandmanager, to understand the ecological responses of your wetland and subsequently refine(or adapt) your management to better achieve your objectives.

Chapter 2: BackgroundThis chapter outlines the different types of monitoring and how they fit into a monitoringprogram, putting your data collection efforts into an overall context which is ultimatelyabout improving the management of your wetland.

Chapter 3: Your monitoring program: Starting on the right footThis chapter explains scientific principles that influence site selection and levels of replicationand also the protocols that should be considered when establishing and implementing amonitoring program. Both of these will ultimately affect the quality and accuracy of thedata you collect and therefore how confident you can be about the data.

Chapter 4: Data collection techniques: A guide to collecting useful data about your wetlandWithout being too prescriptive (as each wetland differs), this chapter poses some possiblequestions that wetland managers may like to pursue through their monitoring program anddetails the range of monitoring techniques (both baseline and ongoing) available in eachcase. It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, equipment required andmethods. It also provides reference to a suitable data sheet (reproduced as an appendix)that can be copied and used by wetland managers.

1.2 WHY MONITOR WETLANDS?Good wetland management requires knowledge and flexibility:• knowledge (obtained through monitoring, as well as other sources, such as guidelines) about

the condition of your wetland and how it is responding to your management• flexibility (through applying the adaptive management model, see figure 1) to look at how

your management could be adjusted (in light of your monitoring results) to achieve yourwetland objectives.

Getting to know your wetlandEssentially, differences within and between wetlands highlight the importance of closelymonitoring changes in your wetland.

It has been said that there is no ‘silver bullet’ solution to an environmental problem that will workeffectively in all situations.4 This is particularly relevant to wetlands. All wetlands differ in someway, and variations may occur in: • wetland substrate;• topography;• seed banks;• position on the floodplain;• water permanence; and • connectivity to the main channel.

your wetland - monitoring manual 3

‘All wetlands differ in some way....’

CHAPTER 1: Introduction

Page 10: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Responses observed in a single wetland over time will also vary and may be linked to any numberof influences that cannot be controlled through wetland management including:• effects of floods;• cumulative effects of changing water regimes; and • broader climatic or environmental factors occurring in other parts of Australia.

While hydrology guidelines provide a guide for managers3, responses you observe in your wetlandthrough your monitoring program are the key to determining which management approach youadopt to achieve your wetland objectives.

The key to adaptive managementMonitoring – getting to know your wetland and how it is responding to management - is essentialto the adaptive management model, which in turn is essential to achieving good wetlandmanagement. Put simply, how can you adapt and improve management if you don’t have goodknowledge about your wetland (baseline monitoring) and know how your wetland is respondingto management (ongoing monitoring)?

When you commit to wetland management, you also commit to long-term monitoring. Over time,through ongoing monitoring and adaptive management,you will be better able to predict your wetland’s responsesand have the opportunity to experiment with differentmanagement options. The result will be bettermanagement and ecological health for your wetland.

While this manual does not include details on how to evaluate and interpret the data you collect,it is important to note that the data collection techniques (Chapter 4) you use will allow for this tooccur. By collecting the monitoring data, you will become better-informed managers, and byconsulting with wetland experts on the interpretation of your data, you can begin developingmanagement guidelines that are tailored to your wetland. As your data is interpreted, you canstart filling in the table of water regime requirements for your wetland (see Appendix 1).

The stages involved in adaptive management are shown in Figure 1, which builds on the basicadaptive management model presented in Your Wetland: Hydrology Guidelines.3 Figure 1 includesadditional steps that will aid in developing monitoring programs. Stages of the adaptivemanagement model specifically addressed in this manual are shaded and further outlined below.

DESCRIBE CURRENT UNDERSTANDING OF WETLAND

The first step in adaptive management is to describe how your wetland operates using yourknowledge about its structure, function and environmental values. This helps you to identify anyinformation gaps.

IDENTIFY QUESTIONS THAT NEED ANSWERING

Decide what information you require to understand your wetland better and outline the keyquestions that need answering.

GATHER BASELINE DATA

Gathering baseline data involves the collection of pre-management data to provide informationon the specific plant and animal species present (see Chapter 3). This information helps to definethe actions required to address management issues and identify management objectives.

your wetland - monitoring manual4

‘When you commit to wetlandmanagement, you also commit to

long-term monitoring.’

CHAPTER 1: Introduction

Page 11: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 5

IDENTIFY OPTIONS / CHOICES FOR MANAGEMENT

Determine the options for managing your wetland based on the results from baseline surveys andother historical information about how the wetland operates. This stage occurs simultaneouslywith identifying your management objectives.

IDENTIFY OBJECTIVES

This stage involves defining measurable goals for the wetland management project based onfindings from the baseline survey and local knowledge. This stage occurs simultaneously withidentifying options / choices for management.

PREDICT RESPONSES

Develop an idea of how and where you expect changes to occur as a result of differentmanagement actions.

DECISION TO MANAGE

Make the decision about whether to actively manage your wetland or not, based on themonitored findings and predicted changes in response to different management scenarios.

ESTABLISH A MONITORING PROGRAM BEFORE MANAGEMENT

Assess the data collected during the baseline survey to determine if it adequately addresses theobjectives you set for the project. If not, ensure your monitoring program is designed to reflectyour management objectives.

MANAGEMENT

Identify your management options and undertake management actions (for examples, see YourWetland: Hydrology Guidelines3).

RECORD MANAGEMENT

Document your management options and objectives to enable the outcomes to be assessed.

MONITOR EFFECTS OF MANAGEMENT

Carry out ongoing monitoring.

UNDERSTAND THROUGH RESEARCH

Encourage research projects in wetlands. Understanding how wetlands function will assist ininterpreting changes in your wetland.

RESULTS

Collate and interpret results from monitoring and research.

EVALUATE PREDICTIONS AND OBJECTIVES

Interpret and evaluate results from monitoring and research against the predictions and objectivesset for the wetland management project.

REFINE MANAGEMENT / OBJECTIVES

Use new knowledge about your wetland to adapt management to better achieve your wetlandobjectives. You may even decide to refine your objectives. This stage feeds back into predictingmore closely the response of your wetland.

CHAPTER 1: Introduction

Page 12: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual6

Figure 1: Adaptive management model (adapted from Tucker et. al. 20023)

Describe currentunderstanding of

wetland

Identifyoptions/choices for

management Evaluatepredictions/objectives

Identify objectives

Refine management

Predict responses

Understand throughresearch

Establish monitoringprogram before

management Record managementManagement

RESULTS

Identify questions that need answering

Gather baseline data

Decision to manage Monitor effects ofmanagement

CHAPTER 1: Introduction

Page 13: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Chapter 2: Background

your wetland - monitoring manual 7

Page 14: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

There are three key components to the data collection stage of a monitoring program. Theseinclude: • knowledge and experience; • techniques; and • equipment.

Each of these components is required if you want to implement a successful monitoring program.While knowledge comes with training and experience (especially in the area of plant and animalidentification), techniques can be learned from this manual and equipment can be borrowed orpurchased.

There are two different types of wetland monitoring:• Baseline monitoring (or pre-management surveys) will help you get to know your wetland and

provide information on what plant and animal species live in and use the wetland. Baselinedata will also inform you about the threats and assets of your wetland and help in identifyingactions needed to address or enhance these.

• Ongoing monitoring (or a regular monitoring program) helps you understand the changesoccuring in your wetland over time. Prior to management, ongoing monitoring involves settingup monitoring programs suitable for assessing management objectives. Once wetlandmanagement begins, ongoing monitoring helps to determine if the Golden Rules (see page 9)are being followed, if you are meeting your management objectives and what the off-targeteffects of management are.

2.1 BASELINE MONITORING

Baseline monitoring is a tool to help you decide where to head with your wetland managementproject. As outlined in Your Wetland: Hydrology Guidelines3, this type of monitoring enables youto determine the hydrological and ecological options and limitations that may influence the wayyou manage your wetland. It also assists in identifying management objectives and issues that canbe addressed through management.

Baseline monitoring enables you to record the species and communities resident in your wetlandduring ‘regular conditions’ prior to management. Evaluating the results will help to determine theextent of any possible degradation and if the wetland contains threatened and or endangeredspecies. While these techniques are robust, longer-term monitoring is required if you decide topick up all species and communities that inhabit your wetland. In addition, surveys need to occurduring a range of conditions that include periods of drought and flooding.

VegetationVegetation is a key element within the wetland that changes in response to water regimemanagement. Thus, the focus of vegetation surveys is to establish an inventory of vegetation inyour wetland at known locations to provide a basis for mapping the broad vegetation associationwithin your wetland. Vegetation surveys will provide a list of the species present in each of thevegetation zones and cover abundance values for each species present (see Section 4.1, Technique 1).

your wetland - monitoring manual8

CHAPTER 2: Background

Page 15: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

The ‘‘GOLDEN RULES’...of managing wetlands

These Golden Rules should prevail over all other decisions you make

about managing your wetland.

THEY SHOULD NEVER BE BROKEN!

Don’t kill long lived vegetationUnderstand the water stress tolerances of species such as lignum (Muehlenbeckia florulenta)

and red gums (Eucalyptus camaldulensis) to ensure their survival is not compromised by your

water regime management. Maintaining established red gums requires an average flood

frequency of 1-3 years, not lasting for more than 18-24 months.5,6 Experiences in the Barmah

Forest have shown shallow flooding over hot summer months caused moisture stress and death

of mature red gums.7 Lignum require an average flood frequency of 1-8 years, not lasting for

more than 3-5 months.5 Complete drying between flood cycles is required for both of these

species.5

Don’t salinise your wetlandEnsure that you understand the ground water processes under your wetland before you embark

on an extended drying. Ensure there is a freshwater lens (layer of freshwater under a dry

wetland) and monitor its integrity through a number of dry stages.

Let big floods through. This will ensure the difference in water height between the wetland and

floodplain is minimised, reducing hydraulic pressure and lowering the risk of saline regional

ground water rising to the surface in, and at the edges of, your wetland.

Don’t destroy threatened communities or habitats of threatened species

Get to know your wetland before you change anything. Learn about its flora and fauna to

ensure that changing the water regime will not compromise the habitats of threatened species

and communities.

your wetland - monitoring manual 9

CHAPTER 2: Background

Page 16: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual10

CHAPTER 2: Background

Fauna The focus of fauna surveys depends on the type of wetland you plan to manage in line with therelevant hydrological surveys. If you choose to manage a temporary wetland that dries naturallyfor two to ten years at a time, you need to consider surveying the small mammals and reptilesresident in and around the wetland basin. If you are establishing baseline fauna data for a wetlandthat is permanently inundated, your focus needs to be on resident fauna that rely on water such asfish, macroinvertebrates and water birds.

Baseline fauna surveys should include: • Fish – an assessment of the number of species and abundances in a range of habitats (see

Section 4.4, Technique 11)• Macroinvertebrates – an assessment of the number of species and abundances in a range of

habitats (see Section 4.5, Technique 13) • Small mammals/reptiles – an assessment of the number of species and abundance in a range of

habitats (see Section 4.6, Technique 15)• Water birds – identifying if there are/were any historical records of colonial nesting in the

wetland, recording the species of water birds, approximate numbers and breeding activities (seeSection 4.7, Technique 17).

HydrologyIn the early stages of planning your wetland management project, it is essential to identify thehydrological options and limitations to management. To ensure the physical options and limitationsare also identified and understood, gather as much information as possible about the surface andgroundwater in and around the wetland prior to management. Other documents outline the keystages involved in establishing a wetland management plan and cover in detail with the need tounderstand surface water flows.8,8a

SURFACE WATER

Historical records will help you unravel the past water regime of your wetland. The extent offlooding flows can be established using historical aerial photography and flood inundation levelsrecorded via remotely sensed imagery. Backwater curves can be used with assistance from staff atthe Department of Water Land and Biodiversity Conservation – by comparing backwater curveswith historical river flows you can reveal the history of flooding in your wetland. Remember tospeak to people in your local community who may have spent time at the wetland and candescribe the pattern of surface water flow in response to flooding, and maybe even remember thearea of inundation for particular flooding events.

WATER QUALITY

Baseline monitoring of surface water in your wetland should include monitoring the salinity,turbidity and water depth (see Section 4.3, Technique 8).

GROUNDWATER

To understand the patterns of groundwater movement in and around your wetland, gathergroundwater depth and salinity data from transects established perpendicular to the wetland. Thisdata also highlights the dynamics of groundwater in your wetland before the wetland is managedand this may have implications for the hydrology if changes are proposed (see Section 4.2,Technique 6).

Page 17: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

2.2 ONGOING MONITORING

As soon as the baseline monitoring data is collated, the next step towards designing yourmonitoring program is to involve experts in the interpretation and evaluation of the data youcollected to identify what you will need to monitor on an ongoing basis. The information fromyour baseline survey will also help you identify the options and limitations for management andconsider the impacts of changing management on a local and regional scale. If management is aconsideration, baseline survey data can assist in predicting the biological responses that mightoccur as a result of management – therefore providing a focus for your ongoing monitoringefforts (see Figure 1).

Ongoing monitoring addresses:• whether the Golden Rules (see page 9) are being obeyed• pre-management monitoring• are you achieving your management objectives?• off-target effects of management (ie. consider your wetland within its regional context).

Are you obeying the Golden Rules?If you break the Golden Rules, you and your wetland are in big trouble! The following monitoringtechniques will provide early warning signs that the Golden Rules are being broken. To monitorthe Golden Rules, you need to assess:• groundwater in the dry wetland basin to find out if the thickness and salinity of the layer

under the wetland, known as a lens, changes in response to seasons and flood cycles in theRiver Murray as well as active management (see Section 4.2, Technique 7)

• groundwater levels and salinity in vegetation units around the edge of the wetland to identifyif there is groundwater pressure that could impact on the salinity of the wetland (see Section4.2, Technique 7)

• the health of long-lived vegetation using a combination of photo-point assessment and semi-quantitative assessment of red gum canopy density (see Section 4.1, Technique 4)

• the presence of threatened species and or communities, including details of their health andabundance.

Pre-management monitoring Once baseline data has been collected and the objectives for management are set, the need foradditional pre-management data needs to be assessed. Data collected during baseline monitoringneeds to be analysed to work out if the information collected is adequate for assessing yourwetland objectives over time. If the baseline monitoring data is not adequate, additional pre-management monitoring would be required (for example, a different technique may be requiredto adequately assess the objectives).

Are you achieving your objectives?It is essential that the objectives of your wetland management project are monitored. Byaccurately recording your wetland response to management, you can measure your project’sprogress and if it is moving towards achieving the desired outcomes. This is a crucial part ofadaptive management, and it ensures you learn from your experiences, good or bad, and enablesyou to refine your management actions (see Figure 1).

your wetland - monitoring manual 11

CHAPTER 2: Background

Page 18: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual12

CHAPTER 2: Background

The information you collect through monitoring enables you to accurately design long-termmanagement/operational guidelines specific to your wetland (see Appendix 1). To do this, it isessential that basic information about how your wetland was managed is recorded. For example, ifyou are managing the water regime of your wetland, you would need to: • establish a management log book with a standard format (see Section 4.3, Technique 10) and • record surface water levels at key stages of management (see Section 4.3, Technique 10).

Combining management information and results from monitoring objectives will allow you to startdeveloping your management actions.

Off-target effects While planning your ongoing monitoring program, keep in mind that many of the components thatmake up a wetland are intricately linked and complex. Consequently, to make informed decisionsabout managing your wetland, you need to consider:• the interaction between the hydrology of individual wetlands;• the degree of connection to the River Murray through the general geomorphology of each

wetland; and• the resulting biological communities that are present in the wetland or group of wetlands.

Off-target effects refer to the impact your management may have on parameters that you are notspecifically aiming to influence with management (for example, those parameters that are notincluded in your objectives). These impacts may be positive or negative and could thereforeinfluence future management decisions.

While the focus of monitoring should be on your objectives, it is also important to consider themany parameters suggested in this manual and how they can influence each other. For example,water levels influence the types of birds that inhabit a wetland, water quality influencesinvertebrate communities which in turn influence the community composition of birds. Collectinginformation about parameters that interact within your wetland ecosystem will increase yourunderstanding of the particular range of biological responses you observe.

Page 19: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Chapter 3: Your monitoring program

your wetland - monitoring manual 13

Page 20: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

3.1 DESIGNING A PROGRAM

Designing a monitoring program is a complex undertaking and there are a number of steps youneed to consider before the point of implementation is reached. To begin, you need to outlineyour questions to focus your monitoring efforts. Onceyou have worked out what these are, you need toundertake preliminary studies or pilot studies to helpwork out how you can collect the greatest amount ofuseful information for the least amount of effort.Pilot studies are then followed by the selection ofsampling sites (see Appendix 2).

Key questions for your monitoring project relate to management. The management objectives youare aiming for will determine your monitoring questions and subsequently the types of datacollection you will do.

When it comes to monitoring, unfortunately there are no short cuts. The level of confidence youhave in your results is directly related to the amount of effort invested. The level of expertiseapplied to a project can also increase this level of confidence. This is particularly relevant to theproject design phase.

Table 1 identifies the level of resourcingrequired to achieve a certain monitoringoutcome and indicates if you are in therunning for a monitoring medal, ranging fromplastic through to gold. These evaluationlevels reflect both the degree of confidenceyou can have in your data and the amount ofeffort required. To be in the running for aplastic medal, for example, your effort inrecording the number of tortoises you saw inyour wetland on just one day after starting tomanage your wetland will provide data that isof little use for management.

Table 1 also highlights the benefits ofcollecting ‘pre-management’ data. If you dohave opportunities to monitor beforemanagement, there is a good chance you willbe in the running for a gold medal. At thislevel, confidence increases significantly as thelevel of sampling increases to the point whereintensive sampling of the tortoise populationis carried out in both your wetland and inanother similar wetland for comparison (alsoknown as a control site).

your wetland - monitoring manual14

CHAPTER 3: Your monitoring programStarting on the right foot

‘…there are no short cuts. Thelevel of confidence you have inyour results is directly relatedto the amount of effort invested.’

Research and monitoring - Whatis the difference?

The outcomes and application of research andmonitoring differ. Results from monitoring arelimited in their application and can be used todescribe an ecosystem within a set series ofcircumstances (for example, document theresponse of a single wetland to an alteredwater regime in a given year under certainriver and weather conditions). Research on theother hand seeks to answer specific questionsand test hypotheses with findings that, as ageneral rule, can be more widely applied to arange of circumstances (for example,investigate the processes in wetlands withfindings that can be applied to a number ofwetlands). With the information in thisdocument you will be well equipped to set upand implement a monitoring programme. It isimportant to understand the limitations of thedata collected and remember, if you want toapply your findings more widely, you will needto design a more in-depth research project.

Page 21: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 15

CHAPTER 3: Your monitoring program

Exam

ple

(O

bje

ctiv

e: T

oin

crea

se t

ort

ois

e n

um

ber

s)

“I s

aw lo

ts o

f to

rto

ises

aft

erw

e h

ad d

on

e th

e w

ork

.”

“Th

ere

was

a g

rad

ual

incr

ease

in t

he

nu

mb

er o

fto

rto

ises

in t

he

two

yea

rsaf

ter

the

wo

rk.”

“Th

ere

wer

e m

ore

to

rto

ises

afte

r th

e w

ork

th

an b

efo

re”

or

“Aft

er r

ehab

ilita

tio

n t

her

ew

ere

mo

re t

ort

ois

es in

th

eco

ntr

ol w

etla

nd

th

an t

he

man

aged

wet

lan

d”

“Th

e n

um

ber

of

tort

ois

esin

crea

sed

aft

er r

ehab

ilita

tio

nin

th

e m

anag

ed w

etla

nd

bu

tn

ot

in t

he

con

tro

l wet

lan

d”

“Th

e in

crea

se in

th

e n

um

ber

of

tort

ois

es1

in t

he

man

aged

wet

lan

d w

as g

reat

er t

han

any

incr

ease

at

eith

er c

on

tro

lw

etla

nd

Des

crip

tio

n

Un

rep

licat

ed, u

nco

ntr

olle

d,

anec

do

tal o

bse

rvat

ion

aft

erre

hab

ilita

tio

n

Un

rep

licat

ed, u

nco

ntr

olle

d,

sam

plin

g a

fter

reh

abili

tati

on

Un

rep

licat

ed, u

nco

ntr

olle

d,

sam

plin

g b

efo

re a

nd

aft

erre

hab

ilita

tio

no

rU

nre

plic

ated

, co

ntr

olle

d,

sam

plin

g a

fter

reh

abili

tati

on

Un

rep

licat

ed, c

on

tro

lled

,sa

mp

ling

bef

ore

an

d a

fter

reh

abili

tati

on

Rep

licat

ed s

amp

ling

,re

plic

ated

co

ntr

ols

, sam

plin

gb

efo

re a

nd

aft

erm

anag

emen

t

Leve

l of

con

fid

ence

Ver

y lo

w

Low

Mo

der

ate

Hig

h

Ver

y h

igh

Leve

l of

inte

nsi

ty

Low

,o

pp

ort

un

isti

csu

rvey

s

Low

– m

ediu

m

Med

ium

Hig

h

Inte

nsi

ve

Leve

l of

kno

wle

dg

ere

qu

ired

Low

, no

mo

nit

ori

ng

pro

gra

m

Med

ium

leve

l of

exp

erti

sein

des

ign

an

din

terp

reta

tio

n p

has

e; lo

w in

imp

lem

enta

tio

n

Med

ium

– h

igh

leve

l of

exp

erti

se in

des

ign

an

din

terp

reta

tio

n p

has

e;m

ediu

m in

imp

lem

enta

tio

n*

Hig

h le

vel o

f ex

per

tise

ind

esig

n a

nd

inte

rpre

tati

on

ph

ase;

med

ium

inim

ple

men

tati

on

* ~

Ver

y h

igh

leve

l of

exp

erti

sein

des

ign

, im

ple

men

tati

on

and

inte

rpre

tati

on

ph

ases

~

Eval

uat

ion

leve

l

1. P

last

ic m

edal

2. T

in m

edal

3. B

ron

ze m

edal

4. S

ilver

med

al

5. G

old

med

al

Tab

le 1

: A

sses

sin

g t

he

qu

alit

y o

f yo

ur

mo

nit

ori

ng

res

ult

s: W

hat

are

yo

u a

imin

g f

or

and

wh

at’s

invo

lved

?

~

Ap

pro

ach

ing

th

e re

alm

of

rese

arch

*

Leve

l rec

om

men

ded

by

this

mo

nit

ori

ng

man

ual

Sou

rce:

Ad

apte

d f

rom

Ru

ther

ford

, Jer

ie a

nd

Mar

sh9

1U

nre

plic

ated

refe

rs t

o s

urv

eys

wh

ere

ther

e ar

e n

o r

epea

ted

sam

ple

s at

th

e sa

me

site

, un

con

tro

lled

refe

rs t

o s

urv

eys

wh

ere

ther

e ar

e n

o s

urv

eys

un

der

take

n a

t si

mila

r

site

s th

at w

ill n

ot

be

affe

cted

by

man

agem

ent.

Page 22: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual16

CHAPTER 3: Your monitoring program

At each wetland, you need to take several samples and collect data before and after management.With this information you can confidently assess if the changes you have recorded are a result ofwetland management. You can even start to work out why. Table 1 shows how, as the level ofintensity and expertise increases, the project begins to move into the realm of research.

This manual is aimed at training you to win a bronze or silvermedal – a medium to high level of monitoring intensity with amedium to high level of expertise in the design phase can yieldextremely valuable results for wetland managers. In the initialstages, your evaluation level may be bronze or silver, but asresources become available and your expertise improves, youcould be the next winner of the monitoring Olympics.

3.2 PROTOCOLS

Consistent monitoring = accurate resultsThe information collected using monitoring programs is a way of summarising patterns occurringmore widely within a wetland. When implementing a monitoring program, you need to bemindful of introducing errors that may lead to the wrong interpretation of what is actually goingon.

Errors can occur as a result of: • incorrect site selection (within your wetland and within the site being surveyed);• measuring inaccurately (for example, instrument calibration);• inaccurate observer skills;• unsuitable weather conditions; and• inaccurate records.

While these inaccuracies might appear insignificant when presented alone, combined, they canlead to significant errors in the data collected. To reduce the chances of collecting inaccurate data,some simple precautions can be taken: • Ensure the monitoring equipment is in good condition before the survey (calibrate equipment,

repair nets).• Monitor each site at about the same time of the day during each survey.• Return to the same sites.• Monitor the same location (microhabitat) within the site.• Use the same person to monitor the site (if possible), which will reduce the effects of

subjectivity.• Visit the sites in the same order each time.• Use sharp HB pencils to fill out the data sheets because they can be easily rubbed out, they will

work in the rain, and can be clearly photocopied.2

• Cross through sections of the data sheet that are not relevant to the survey – do not leaveblank spaces.

• Have another field officer check your data sheets at the end of each site to ensure that allsections have been filled out correctly.

• Avoid error in transcribing numbers (particularly coordinates off a GPS) by repeating thenumbers recorded back to the person in the field.

• At the end of each field day, compile the data sheets to ensure that none have been misplaced.

‘This manual is aimed attraining you to win abronze or silver medal’

Page 23: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

• Never write information onto pieces of paper that could easily be misplaced – always recordobservations and other relevant information into a field book.

• If you have decided to monitor a range of parameters (for example, vegetation and birds), copythe data sheets onto different coloured paper to make it easier and quicker to find theappropriate data sheets when you are in the field and office. Coloured data sheets also reducesun glare when undertaking field work.

Consistency and keeping everything exactly the same is the key. It may be tedious, especially after afew surveys. But remember, a consistent approach to surveying, will maximise your confidence in thedata.

NamingUsing standard naming protocols or nomenclature for the presentation of biological data isextremely important. Because names of species and family groups change over time, you need tokeep up to date with name changes to ensure that the data you collect is accurate. The best way todo this is to establish a vouchering system.

Vouchering specimens from your wetland involves collecting a sample of each species found withinyour wetland and having the voucher identified and lodged with the relevant organisation. Forexample, the first time you visit a wetland to undertake a vegetation survey, every specimen shouldbe sampled, pressed and lodged at the state herbarium. It is also advisable to establish a fieldherbarium of your own so you can refer to these species in the future.

Approaching vegetation surveys in this way will ensure revisions in plant taxonomy will not result inthe loss of information about the vegetation in your wetland. If your specimen is lodged at theherbarium when revisions of genus, species, and sub species occur, your data can also be revised andupdated.

Texts are available that set state standards for naming birds, reptiles, amphibians and plants.10,11

When you reach the stage of presenting the data (for example, species lists), it is also important tomake a reference to the naming protocol you have adopted and the texts you used foridentification.

Site descriptionOnce you have decided where each of your monitoring sites is to be located, it is essential toestablish them as permanent sites by describing the location of the survey in detail. This process onlyneeds to be completed the first time you set up a survey location. The standard data sheet for sitedescriptions is in Appendix 3 (details on how to fill out sections of the data sheet are also includedin the appendices). The data sheets and descriptions are adapted from native vegetation survey datasheets.2 However, when undertaking a vegetation inventory, the site description will be part of thephysical data sheet (see Appendix 7).

Data logA data log should be established for your wetland and used to keep track of past and presentmonitoring (see example, Table 2). Before designing your monitoring program, establishing a log ofdata collected in the past is a good place to start working out what should be done in the future.Logging the date, number of sites monitored the type of monitoring undertaken and theperson/people who did the monitoring is a good way of keeping track. This information will helpyou keep track of what has been done and why. It is easy to loose track of what has been donewhen different people have been responsible for monitoring through time.

your wetland - monitoring manual 17

CHAPTER 3: Your monitoring program

Page 24: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Table 2: Example of a data log sheet for a wetland monitoring project

Date Parameter monitored Technique used Number of sites Person / people undertaking monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual18

CHAPTER 3: Your monitoring program

Page 25: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 19

Chapter 4: Data collection techniques

Page 26: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

The techniques you apply to your monitoring program and the data you collect depend largely onyour monitoring questions. This section suggests possible monitoring questions and techniques,but these are only intended as a guide. Your monitoring techniques will need to be tailored to suityour wetland and any anticipated responses, specific management actions and wetland hydrology.

The monitoring techniques presented here are based on acombination of standard monitoring procedures and findingsfrom 18 months of monitoring at eight wetlands in the RiverMurray, South Australia. All wetlands differ, and the questionsyou ask about your wetland will also vary. Therefore, thetechniques in this document can be used only as a starting point.

In some cases you will see that more than one technique is suggested for a type of monitoring –for example, techniques 1 and 2. In this example, both techniques need to be used to adequatelyaddress the baseline survey requirements.

The data you collect during a baseline survey can sometimes be used to as a means of assessingyour management objectives. However, developing an ongoing monitoring program will largelybe based on the specific objectives you set for management. This means that once you have setyour objectives you will need to assess the baseline data you collected to see if it is adequate forassessing your objectives. At this stage you will be able to work out if additional pre-managementmonitoring will need to be undertaken (Figure 2). Targeted monitoring for assessing objectivesprior to management will ensure you have the information to evaluate the success of yourwetland management project in the long-term.

your wetland - supporting information20

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques:a guide to collecting useful data about your wetland

Figure 2: Steps to ensure you have adequate data for assessing management objectives

‘Your monitoring techniqueswill need to be tailored to

suit your wetland’

Undertakebaseline survey

Monitor effects ofmanagement (see

Figure 1)

Assess monitoring dataagainst objectives set –Do you have sufficient

data to assess objectives?

Set up pre-managementmonitoring to assess

objectives

Data analysis

Yes

No

Set / refineobjectives formanagement

Page 27: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 21

4.1 VEGETATION

BASELINE MONITORING

Vegetation inventory - Technique 1

Photo point monitoring - Technique 2

ONGOING MONITORING

Photo point monitoring - Technique 3

Tree health assessment/photo point - Technique 4

Fine scale vegetation monitoring - Technique 5

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 28: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Hydrology is one of the most important factors determining the location of different types ofplant communities on the floodplain.12 When referring to wetlands, the term hydrological regimeof a wetland is used to describe:• how much water;• depth of the water; and• frequency and timing of inundation on a given part of the floodplain.

The hydrological regime is determined in part by the elevation or the position of the floodplain inrelation to the river.13 This results in the clear zonation of vegetation communities on thefloodplain and in the wetland.

There are a number of approaches tomonitoring vegetation communities, rangingfrom highly quantified assessments ofdiversity and abundance to qualitative, visualobservations recorded at permanentlyestablished photo points.

The monitoring methods you use in yourwetland depend largely on the questions youask and the type of wetland you are workingin. Common approaches to monitoringvegetation in wetlands are summarised inAppendix 4. Vegetation monitoringtechniques dealing with baseline monitoring,ongoing monitoring and monitoringmanagement objectives are outlined below.Key references for plant identification areoutlined in Table 3.

For confirmation of species, the State herbarium can provide an accurate identification ofspecimens if you can provide a sample of the plant with flowering or fruiting parts (a fee may becharged). The procedure for collecting specimens is outlined in Appendix 5.

Before commencing vegetation monitoring, you may need to organise a scientific permit from theBiological Survey and Research section (BSR), Department of Environment and Heritage. SeeAppendix 6 to work out if this applies in your area.

your wetland - monitoring manual22

Hydrological regime and the zonation of vegetation communities

The most obvious example of zonation inwetlands is the ring of river red gums that existaround the edge of wetlands. The redgumcommunity with its grassy under storey islocated in areas that experience frequentflooding. As you move away from the morefrequently flooded areas, the black boxvegetation community dominates. While theseare obvious examples of zonation in wetlands,more subtle but quite distinct zones also occurin the bed of the wetland.

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 29: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Table 3: References for plant identification

your wetland - monitoring manual 23

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Comment

Useful reference for identifyingplants at the edges of wetlandsand floodplain, cleardescriptions and colour picturesfor identification.

Excellent pocket sized referencebook for common water plantsin wetlands, clear descriptionsand colour photographs foridentification.

Useful reference for the lesscommon waterplants inwetlands, clear descriptions andcolour photographs foridentification. This reference isout of print and difficult to find.

Floristic key of all plants inSouth Australia. Requires somebotanical knowledge. Containsno photographs, and fewdiagrams. This reference will bemost useful if you know whatfamily the plant is from.

Herbarium publication listingthe plants found in differentregions of the state.

Title

Plants of Western New SouthWales

Waterplants in Australia

Waterplants of New SouthWales

Flora of South Australia

A list of the vascular plants ofSouth Australia (Edition iii)

Source(Ref. No.)

14

15

16

17

18

Author

Cunningham et. al.

Sainty and Jacobs

Sainty and Jacobs

Jessop andToelken

Jessop

Page 30: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual24

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Baseline monitoring

VEGETATION INVENTORY - TECHNIQUE 1The vegetation inventory (Technique 1) is designed to answer the following questions:

What vegetation communities occur in your wetland? Do you have threatened species or communities resident in your wetland?

This technique offers a course level of vegetation inventory that can serve as a starting point forfiner and more detailed monitoring. The methods summarised below are from the Guide to NativeVegetation Survey Using the Biological Survey of South Australia.2 The techniques recommendedfor surveying the vegetation and describing the physical environment in the Guide to NativeVegetation Survey are identical to those required to address the above questions.

Details on how to survey the vegetation should be taken directly from the Guide to NativeVegetation Survey and therefore only a summary of the type of information required is includedbelow. It is important to use the standard methods outlined in the Guide to provide informationfor state, national and international data collection and reporting.

The Guide to Native Vegetation Survey Using the Biological Survey of South Australia can beaccessed via the internet at:http://www.environment.sa.gov.au/biodiversity/pdfs/vegetation_survey_manual.pdf.

There are two components to this survey technique, which will produce a baseline vegetationmap. The components include:• definition of the vegetation associations within your wetland (including the riparian areas)• field assessments of each vegetation association that detail the composition and relative

contribution of the species present in association.

Data sheets required to complete this survey are included in the Appendices section of this manual(Appendix 7), although these will need to be used in conjunction with the Guide to NativeVegetation Survey, as outlined above.

Note: The vegetation inventory technique detailed in this manual does not use the site selectionmethods described in Appendix 2. Site selection is outlined in the Guide to Native VegetationSurvey and is based on identifying areas of vegetation on aerial photographs.

Equipment required • Recent colour aerial photograph of your wetland, as detailed as possible (for example, 1:40 000

for larger wetlands; 1:20 000 for small wetlands), in stereo pair(s) if possible; • Stereo scope and light table;• Topographic map of your wetland (for example, 1:50 000);• GPS (where possible);• Clear overhead sheet, permanent and semi permanent overhead projector pens;• Camera, film, photo point data sheets, (see Appendix 8), physical description data sheets and

vegetation survey data sheets (Appendix 7), photo point data board, compass;• Plant press (open mesh press, cardboard, straps, separated newspaper sheets), voucher

specimen bags, permanent texta, plant voucher data sheet, (see Appendix 5);• Tape measure;

Page 31: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

• Baseline vegetation inventory data sheet (see Appendix 7);• Physical description data sheet (see Appendix 7); and• Opportunistic survey data sheet (see Appendix 7).

MethodsThere are three broad tasks involved when undertaking a baseline vegetation inventory. These tasksinclude:• initial mapping and site selection;• baseline inventory survey; and• final mapping /data basing (not covered in this monitoring manual).

In permanently inundated wetlands where hydrological conditions remain relatively stablethroughout the year, aim to carry out your vegetation inventory when the highest diversity ofspecies occurs and species are at their most abundant. While it is difficult to predict when optimalconditions may occur in any given year, samples taken in late spring around November, are morelikely to contain a wide diversity of species 19. However, if you are intending to do baselinevegetation surveys in a dry year, in and around August and September, you will need to rescheduleyour survey for early spring or October. Equally, if conditions are particularly cool and wet duringlate winter to early spring, time your survey for early summer 19. It is also important to rememberthat ideal ‘spring’ conditions occur at different times at different locations along the River Murray.In the northern part of river (eg SA border - Morgan) ideal conditions occur during mid to lateOctober whereas in the Lower Lakes area ideal conditions would occur later in the season (eg lateNovember).

Select sites before leaving for the field. To do this, attach an overhead transparency to the aerialphotograph of your wetland and using semi permanent overhead pens, identify and then tracearound the different vegetation associations in your wetland based on texture (height), tone,colour, canopy spacing. Texture (height) can be interpreted if you have a stereo pair of photographsand a stereo scope (see section 1 chapter 3 of Guide to Native Vegetation Survey, ‘Survey sites andquadrats’). If you are able to classify these units into broad vegetation types such as red gum,sedges, or open water, your boundaries can then be checked and verified as you carry out your fieldassessment.

Once in the field with your aerial photographs, locate yourself in relation to key features such aslarge trees, road crossings, or inlet locations. Locate each of the vegetation associations youidentified on your aerial photograph and check the boundaries of these vegetation types. You mayneed to combine or add some of the areas that were not so easy to separate or identify on theaerial photograph.

In wetlands, elevation and soil type usually have a major influence on the types of plants that growin different areas of your wetland. Vegetation types that look similar to you on your aerialphotograph may differ considerably once checked in the field. It is important therefore to separatethese areas on your aerial photograph as they could contain a different mix of species, resulting in apossible threatened species being overlooked. For example, you might separate areas of ‘densesedges from areas of mid dense sedges over low density herbs’, and areas of ‘low density sedgesover high density herbs’. Go over these newly defined vegetation associations with a permanentoverhead pen and using a numeric code for each vegetation type, (for example, 1.0 = red gum),identify areas in your wetland with the same vegetation types. Remember to record the codes youhave created at the bottom of your overhead transparency.

your wetland - monitoring manual 25

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 32: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Once each of the key vegetation associations is identified, their composition can be quantifiedusing baseline inventory quadrats. The size of your quadrat should be set according to the Guideto Native Vegetation Survey at 30m X 30m (900 square metres). While the area covered by thequadrat is set, the dimensions can change depending on the type of vegetation association youare surveying. For example, an elongated littoral zone would be best surveyed with a 90m X 10mquadrat (see section 1 chapter 4 of Guide to Native Vegetation Survey, ‘Locating a quadrat in thefield’).

Once each of the key vegetation associations is identified, choose a representative site. Whereverpossible, quadrats should be located away from the edges of the vegetation association and otherdisturbances such as roads or tracks. Within each designated quadrat record the life form, lifestage and cover abundance. Use life form and cover and abundance to determine the vegetationassociation description. At each site the physical environment will also need to be described (seesection 2 chapter 5 of Guide to Native Vegetation Survey, ‘Collecting field data’). If time andresources allow, consider replicating the quadrats in each vegetation type. Record the details ofthe baseline vegetation inventory using the vegetation data sheet (see Appendix 7). Remember tofill in the physical description data sheet for each site as this will provide details on how to re-locate the quadrat and information about the physical environment at the survey site (Appendix7). Details of how to carry out a vegetation survey are outlined in the Guide to Native VegetationSurvey (section 2 chapter 5 ‘Collecting field data’). Appendix 7 provides details on how to includeadditional information about your wetland in this standard Guide to Native Vegetation Surveydata sheet.

Once the quadrats are surveyed, search the area outside the quadrat for any additional specieswithin the vegetation type and record them as opportunistic observations on a separateopportunistic observation data sheet (Appendix 7).

Photograph the vegetation unit. In each of the quadrats, mark the location accurately on theaerial photograph and fill in the physical description data sheet (see Appendix 7). To set up thequadrat photograph, find an area that best represents the vegetation type you are sampling.Using the standard methods outlined in the Guide to Native Vegetation Survey take a horizontalphotograph with a photo point board and range pole in the middle of the photo frame. Tomaximise photo quality take the photograph facing north, this will minimise the shadowingeffects in the photograph. Set the camera to infinity ensuring you have 35mm film and a 50mmlens. If you are using a manual camera set the light meter on the vegetation rather than thephotopoint board (see section 2 chapter 5.1.2 of Guide to Native Vegetation Survey). Fill in thephoto point monitoring data sheet (see Appendix 8) to make it easier to interpret the photographonce printed. It is advisable to take photographs with and without the photopoint board so thatthey can be used in publications.

your wetland - monitoring manual26

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 33: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

PHOTOPOINT MONITORING - TECHNIQUE 2Technique two in baseline vegetation monitoring is designed to answer the following questions:

How does the vegetation in the wetland look prior to changing the management? What is the distribution of large littoral vegetation prior to management?

Establish a series of photographs to track broad scale changes to vegetation in your wetland priorto management. This is one of the most valuable resources you can have once you start observingchanges in your wetland. Setting up permanent photopoints in wetlands needs to be a two-stepprocess. • Establish a series of panoramic photographs to cover large areas of the wetland; and• Establish permanent photopoints within the area covered by the panoramic photograph.

Equipment required• Camera, film, photopoint data sheets (see Appendix 8), site location data sheets,

(see Appendix 3), photopoint data board, range pole, compass, T bar, tape measure;• Topographic map of your wetland (eg 1:50 000);• GPS; and• Step ladder (if required).

MethodsPredicting which areas of vegetation might respond to changes in water regime prior tomanagement is difficult. Panoramic photographs from a high vantage point, combined withpermanently established photopoints provide good coverage of your wetland.

The photopoint monitoring method (Technique 2) that follows differs from the method presentedin the Vegetation Inventory (Technique 1), as it aims to establish photopoints involved in longterm monitoring rather than providing a snapshot of a vegetation association at a single point intime. The photographs therefore have to be able to pick up on changes to vegetation that occurover large areas of the wetland and in locations that continue to provide information, even ifemergent vegetation in your wetland expands (see Technique 3).

When choosing the location of your photographs you should consider the following:• Ensure you are at a relatively high vantage point (eg fallen log, step ladder) so you can

continue the photograph series if emergent vegetation expands or red gums germinate.• Include the sky line in each photograph to provide it with perspective (this will need to be a

major consideration when choosing high vantage points).• Erect a range pole at a set distance from where you are standing to provide your photograph

with a measure of relative height.• Find locations that include fallen logs or dead trees to help keep the photograph series in

perspective.• Find locations that cover all the areas of your wetland, including sites close and at distance

from the wetland inlet or in constricted and open water areas, as these may respond differentlyto management.

• Ensure you are able to locate the photopoint at a later date by recording the site location onthe site location data sheet.

• To record changes in the distribution of large emergent vegetation it is important to takepanoramic photographs in the areas where you predict a possible change in distribution. Thesecould include shallow areas in close proximity to existing stands of emergent vegetation andsmall bays where seeds could accumulate and germinate.

your wetland - monitoring manual 27

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 34: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Once you have located your sites you can proceed to take panoramic photographs. Record thedirection of each photograph in the panoramic series to ensure that the same frame is takenrepeatedly each time you return to the site (see Technique 3).

Within the panoramic area, establish a permanent photopoint. Choose a section of the panoramicseries where you predict vegetation will change in response to management. So that you return tothe exact location, take the photograph in the right direction and at the correct height, use aphotopoint T bar that sleeves into a length of square tube. The square tube can then be cementedinto the ground to ensure the accurate collection of photographic records. Two photographs aretaken from each of the permanently marked sites – one on either end of the T bar.

Ideally, baseline survey photographs of your wetland should be taken during spring when there isa wide diversity of plant species. Photographs in the middle of each season are also useful as anindicator of how the vegetation changes through time. If changes in plant communities areobserved outside of these times, particularly after management, additional photographs should betaken.

For each photograph, fill in the photopoint monitoring data sheet (see Appendix 8). For eachlocation fill in the site location data sheet (see Appendix 3).

your wetland - monitoring manual28

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 35: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Ongoing monitoring

PHOTOPOINT MONITORING - TECHNIQUE 3Technique 3 involves continuing with baseline photographs. This technique is designed to answerthe following questions:

How does the vegetation in the wetland look after management is changed? Does the distribution of large emergent species change after management?

In shallow wetlands that are either dried or partially dried after permanent inundation, emergentspecies including bulrush (Typha spp.) and common rush (Phragmites australis) have been recordedas expanding into the open water areas of wetlands19. In areas where these species haveexpanded, the growth of other emergent and submerged species are likely to be restricted.

Any number of techniques including line intercept, mapping cover and photopoints could be usedto evaluate the impacts of drying on distribution of emergent vegetation. When focusing on largeemergent species, photographs taken from permanent locations around the wetland can be usedas a rapid assessment technique (but this is not a quantitative technique). However, if thephotographs are taken accurately, they can provide you with an overall impression of thedistribution of large emergent vegetation, especially if the plant cover has expanded orcontracted. The photopoint technique described in Technique 2 addresses this question and alsoprovides a visual record of how the vegetation in the wetland changes.

Equipment requiredSee Technique 2.

MethodsThe methods used to assess the distribution of emergent vegetation involve the repeatedcollection of photographic records from the sites selected in Technique 2. If changes you areobserving in your wetland are not being ‘picked up’ by the photographs taken during the baselinesurvey, additional sites can be established. To ensure before and after management information iscollected, these additional permanent monitoring sites need to be established where thepanoramic photographs were taken during the baseline survey.

Photographs should be taken seasonally and compared with baseline survey photographs(Technique 2). Additional photographs should also be taken when major changes in the vegetationcommunity are observed, particularly after key management events.

your wetland - monitoring manual 29

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 36: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

TREE HEALTH ASSESSMENT/PHOTOPOINT - TECHNIQUE 4Technique 4 is used to monitor the first Golden Rule and is designed to answer the followingquestions:

What is the health of deep-rooted long-lived vegetation (namely red gums)? Does the health of these species change over time?

When referring to vegetation ‘health’, there are four key features to consider:• structure and condition of existing plants;• production of viable seeds;• successful germination; and• successful recruitment to the population.This technique focuses on the structure and condition of existing trees (long-lived deep-rootedplants) but observations on germination success and recruitment to the population should also berecorded.

Salinity, frequency of floodplain inundation, climate, insect infestation and altering the waterregime of wetlands are just a few of the stressors that could affect the health of long-livedvegetation. Managing a wetland water regime can expose this vegetation to the unintendedconsequence of water stress due to extended periods of inundation followed by extended periodswithout water. The water stress, tolerances of some species are known (see the golden rules), butthese are only a guide because the specific responses depend on the specific conditions that existat your wetland. This is why it is extremely important to record the health of the long-livedvegetation in your wetland.

Equipment required• Camera, film, compass;• GPS; and• Tree health assessment data sheet (see Appendix 9).

MethodsWithout extensive investigation, it is difficult to determine the condition and overall health offloodplain vegetation as well as the cause of declining condition of floodplain vegetation.However, there are some simple techniques that can be used to assess these changes in vegetationhealth.

When you are managing the water regime of your wetland and conditions are approaching thewater stress tolerances of key species of long lived, deep rooted vegetation including red gum,monitoring this species allows you to observe whether they are exhibiting signs of stress. If youcan identify and record the early warning signs of stress in response to altering the waterconditions from dry to wet or vice versa, you can work to change these conditions to bring aboutthe ‘recovery’ of the species.

Photographic records and descriptions are helpful in identifying early warnings of water stress dueto extended periods of inundation or drying, especially if the photographs are taken before themanagement stage of either flooding or drying, and followed up on occasions when water stress isbe most likely to occur. For example, if you are extending the duration of flooding in your redgum areas, check on their health as you approach seven months of continuous flooding andespecially during hot weather when there is shallow water around the base of mature trees.

your wetland - monitoring manual30

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 37: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 31

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

As you approach 18 months of continuous flooding, which is considered to be the upper limit ofknown water stress tolerance for red gums, it is important to monitor for signs of water stressrelatively frequently. This will ensure that management is in place to respond when needed toprevent the trees from water logging. Because site specific factors may make individual trees moresusceptible or more tolerant to the management actions than expected, ongoing assessments arerequired to prevent breaking the golden rules.

To pick up longer-term changes to tree health, annual surveys during the growing season (iespring) are designed to help you assess if tree health is declining.

Monitoring long-lived deep-rooted vegetation should occur at each of the baseline vegetationinventory sites (Technique 1). Additional tree health assessments may also be undertakenelsewhere within the wetland to cover a greater geographical area. This is required at wetlandswhere the number of baseline vegetation inventory sites is low.

At each baseline vegetation inventory site (Technique 1), select at least ten trees (alive and dead)that represent the tree health at that site. If a mix of tree species is present, then assess the tentrees (dead or living) in proportion to dominance/codominance. For example, if there isproportionately 80% E. camaldulensis var. camaldulensis and 20% E. largiflorens, then measure 8and 2 respectively. If less than ten trees are present in the quadrat, then assess trees beyond thequadrat but within the vegetation community type that reflects the vegetation communitysurveyed in the quadrat. Choose individual trees that represent an overview of tree health (deador living) within that vegetation community. Stand back from each tree with sufficient distance sothat you can view as much as possible of the whole canopy of each individual tree. Assess thehealth using the Tree Health Rating criteria (Table 4). In areas of denser trees, choose a transectline (this can be the same line used to select trees for the overstorey measurements) and movealong this line assessing representative trees. Take photographs of individual trees or clumps oftrees. Remember to include the entire canopy of trees in the photographs. Fill out a tree healthassessment data sheet allocating a tree health category for each of the ten trees assessed(Appendix 9). When tree health assessment is being undertaken at a baseline vegetationinventory site the location of the tree health assessments will be recorded in detail on the physicalsite assessment data sheet (Appendix 7).

When tree health assessment is undertaken at a site where no baseline vegetation inventory isundertaken, you will again need to assess the health of ten trees within the area identified and fillin the tree assessment data sheet (Appendix 9). In addition, it is critical in this case to also fill in asite description data sheet from Appendix 3 to ensure that this site can be relocated in the future.

Red gums, black box and river coobahSemi quantified techniques currently available for assessing the health of Eucalyptus trees havebeen adapted by CSIRO and DEH project teams for application in the floodplain impacts nativevegetation survey 20.

This method involves a visual assessment of the percentage of original canopy present, deadbranches and epicormic growth (growth originating from the middle of the branches). The scoringsystem allocates the tree into one of six categories, ranging from between zero and five (see Table4). A score of five is considered to be relatively healthy with no visual signs of stress whereas a treewith zero is dead.

Page 38: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual32

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Table 4: Method used to assess tree health on River Murray floodplain, SA

Note:This table is adapted from Grimes (1987) and Lay and Meissner (1995) for the South Australian River Murray Floodplain Vegetation Survey (Oct –Nov 2002).

Tree Health Rating

5

4

3

2

1

0

Tree Health Rating Description

Tree with >75% of original canopy present, Less than 5% epicormic growth, May include some dead branchlets and leaves.

Tree with 50 – 75% of original canopy present, Epicormic growth less than 10% of remaining canopy, Some dead branchlets (<50% of canopy)

Tree with 25 – 49% of original canopy present, Some epicormic growth (<50% of remaining canopy), Some small dead branches.(<50% canopy)

Tree with < 25% of original canopy present, Predominantly epicormic growth (>50% of remaining canopy), Some main branches dead (<50% canopy)

Unhealthy tree with no original canopy,All epicormic growth, Most main branches dead. (>50% canopy)

Dead Tree

Main branch Branchlet

Small branch Foliage andepicormic

growth

Page 39: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Rating Visual assessment

5 Tree with >75% of the original canopy present

May include some dead branchlets and leaves

<5% epicormic growth

4 Tree with 50-75% of the original canopy present

Some dead branchlets (<50% of canopy)

<10% epicormic growth

3 Tree with 25-49% of the original canopy present

Some small dead branches

Some epicormic growth (<50% of remaining canopy)

your wetland - monitoring manual 33

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 40: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Rating Visual assessment

2 Tree with <25% of the original canopy present

Some main branches dead (<50% canopy)

Predominantly epicormic growth (>50 % of remaining canopy)

1 Tree with no original canopy

Most main branches dead

All epicormic growth

0 Dead tree

your wetland - monitoring manual34

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 41: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Eucalyptus largiflorens

Rating 0 Rating 1

your wetland - monitoring manual 35

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 42: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Eucalyptus largiflorens

Rating 2 Rating 3

your wetland - monitoring manual36

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 43: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Eucalyptus largiflorens

Rating 4 Rating 4

your wetland - monitoring manual 37

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 44: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual38

Eucalyptus largiflorens

Rating 5

Rating 5

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 45: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 39

Eucalyptus camaldulensis

Rating 0 Rating 1

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 46: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Eucalyptus camaldulensis

Rating 1 Rating 2

your wetland - monitoring manual40

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 47: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Eucalyptus camaldulensis

Rating 3 Rating 4

your wetland - monitoring manual 41

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 48: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual42

Eucalyptus camaldulensis

Rating 5

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 49: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 43

Acacia stenophylla

Rating 4 Rating 4

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 50: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual44

Other information like leaf discolouration should also be recorded to identify signs of stress.Estimating the percentage of the tree affected by discolouration enables you to make comparisonsduring consequent surveys.

Red gums in particular, have been observed to respond to water stress by changing the colour ofadult leaves from green to a burgundy-red, prior to extensive leaf drop 21. In the 1990s mature redgums around Lake Littra were flooded in two consecutive years. The first sign of water stress dueto the extended periods of inundation was the extensive discolouration of the adult leaves(burgundy-red). Once the water was removed from around the base of the trees, the health of thetrees improved 21. There are other examples of trees that have been permanently inundated andfollowing extensive discolouration (burgundy-red) the adult leaves turned yellow and dropped.This was followed by epicormic growth 21.

Care needs to be taken in the assessment of leaf drop and discolouration in red gums. Pastobservations have shown it can vary between years, and can actually occur in response to a growthflush during drought and continuous flooding 5. If leaf drop and discolouration is recorded, it isimportant to consider the conditions leading up to and surrounding the event. If, for example, leaffall occurs during the growing season of spring to mid summer immediately after a dry phase, it ispossible that the leaves are dropping and changing in response to a growth spurt 5. On the otherhand, where red gums have been continuously inundated for more than 18 months, and theirleaves have begun to change colour and drop during winter, the response is more likely to be oneof water stress.

LignumIt is difficult to assess the water stress features of lignum because of the water conservationmethods it employs. For example, the plant goes into a stunted growth stage when in droughtand appears brown without any leaves. After a long dry period, it responds rapidly to an increasein water availability by producing new stems, leaves and flowers. The leaves are then shed rapidly,possibly for water conservation, but the stems remain green 5.

As this species becomes increasingly stressed, its water conservation efforts increase and thebranches become less dense. Under extremely stressed conditions they have been observed withsections of the plant dying 21.

Because it is difficult to identify water stress in this species it is extremely important to consider itswater stress tolerances.

When describing the health of lignum, make note of these features:• proportion of dead branches;• density of the bush; and• colour.

Where possible, estimate the percentage of the plant affected by these changes to help youcompare the descriptions during consequent surveys. This information needs careful evaluation toensure it is interpreted correctly. Photographs of this species will be invaluable for longer-termhealth assessment.

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 51: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 45

Identifying impactsMonitoring long-term aspects of vegetation health is a valuable aid in assessing if there are anylong-term stresses impacting on the vegetation surrounding your wetland. If you record a declinein vegetation health then it is important to find out the cause of the impact. For example,position on the floodplain (location in relation to weir pools), frequency of flooding, salinity ordrought can all be linked to a decline in tree health. You need to consider these closely andmonitor the groundwater conditions around the plants to ensure that your management is notactually causing the observed decrease in health. At this stage, additional resources such as experthelp may be required to assist in assessing the causes of the decline. With expert information, youcan then work towards improving the way you manage your wetland.

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 52: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual46

FINE SCALE VEGETATION MONITORING -TECHNIQUE 5Technique 5, monitoring your objectives, is designed to answer the following questions:

How does the distribution of vegetation in your wetland change after management?What is the composition, cover and life stage of different vegetative habitats

within the wetland?

(NOTE: The focus of your questions depends on your specific objectives – that is, if yourobjective is to support submerged vegetation then your question and techniques focus onthis habitat type).

When assessing your habitat objectives, your baseline vegetation inventory data (collected usingTechnique 1) is not an adequate starting point on its own. To answer the questions posed forTechnique 5, additional pre-management data is required. This technique focuses on areas whereyou predict changes to happen as a result of management. This information can indicate whetheror not you are achieving your objectives.

The specific techniques you use to assess your objectives will depend on the specific objectives youset for your wetland project. This techniques provides an example as a starting point.

If your primary objective for managing your wetland is to achieve a range of different vegetativehabitats, it is essential to know about the life stages of the plants in your wetland, particularlywhen you are intending to change from one stage of wetland management to another (forexample, from wet to dry, or from dry to wet). As outlined in Your Wetland: Hydrology Guidelines,the information collected with this technique enables you to observe any significant reduction inthe abundance of submerged vegetation and identify when the majority of the submerged or drywetland bed plants have flowered and set seed.

Monitoring the abundance of submerged vegetation needs to take place over a period of twelvemonths. This ensures the plants have had at least one season to germinate and grow.

Before making any decisions about when to change from one management stage to another (egwet to dry or, dry to wet) the monitoring data needs to be assessed each time it is collected to beused as a guide. As a starting point for data assessment, the following changes are consideredsignificant:• 50-60% of the key species should be flowering (submerged and dry wetland plants) and / or• 50-60% reduction in cover values for submerged plants.

Take care when assessing changes to the abundance of submerged vegetation. Ribbon weed forexample, has been recorded growing vigorously during summer and naturally dying back at thebeginning of winter. 5 It is probable that this is the case for many other submerged aquaticspecies. When monitoring changes to the abundance of submerged vegetation over time,remember to consider seasonal fluctuations in the assessment of cover estimates. Comparisonbetween years provides a better indication of dieback rather than a comparison between seasons.

Equipment required• Quadrat (size determined by species area curves)• Plant press, voucher specimen bags, permanent texta• Plant voucher specimen data sheet (see Appendix 5)• Site location data sheet (see Appendix 3)• Vegetation monitoring data sheet (see Appendix 10).

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 53: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 47

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

MethodsStart to design your monitoring by working out which areas you intend to affect by yourmanagement regime as this is where you should focus your survey effort. If, for example, you areable to use available wetland inlet structures to hold water into the red gum area during mediumsized floods, then your survey area needs to extend just beyond this area to ensure all of thehabitats affected by management are monitored.

To look at the changes in response to management, you will need to undertake sampling toinclude before and after the ‘event’ of changing the water regime (eg filling or drying, seeAppendix 2). Remember that vegetation composition and abundance changes through time 19. Topick up on these changes several surveys need to be undertaken.

Key times for monitoring include:• before management and at times when you predict diversity and abundance of most species to

be highest (eg late spring);• approximately two months after filling the wetland during warm months, to check on

germination success of submerged species;• during late spring after management to compare to pre management data; and• at the end of a dry stage to assess the net result of drying on dry wetland bed vegetation

growth.

If you are using the techniques presented here to decide when to change from one managementstage to another (eg wet to dry or dry to wet) the frequency of monitoring needs to be increasedat key times during the year (eg at times when you observe major changes in plant abundance orlife stage).

To answer the questions posed at the beginning of this section, two monitoring methods aresuggested. The line intercept method assesses the distribution of vegetative habitats. The secondmethod uses quadrat based surveys to quantify the composition, life stage and abundance ofvegetation within the identified zones.

However, these methods do not account for the wetland’s potential to germinate a range ofdifferent species under a range of different conditions (eg permanently inundated, moist soil, drywetland bed). If your interest also includes observing and recording the germination potential inyour wetland, you need to think about seed bank experiments. Suggestions on how to undertakethis work are outlined in a publication by Brock (1997) 22.

Line intercept methodThe line intercept method is designed to help assess changes in the distribution of vegetation inyour wetland. Start by marking a permanent starting point, fill out a site location data sheet anduse a tape measure to mark out a transect on a set bearing. Start the transect in the areainfluenced by management and extend the tape measure to the middle of the wetland. On thedata sheet, record the distance of different vegetation types along the tape (for example sedgesand water plants). Differences in plant composition within identified vegetation types should alsobe separated (for example, where water plants are dominated by water milfoil and distinct areasof ribbon weed). For each of the zones, record a list of species present two metres either side ofthe transect.

Page 54: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Quadrat based surveysFirst you need to identify the zones where you predict changes to occur and management to havethe greatest effect. Using a dumpy level, measure and record the elevation of these key zones andestablish permanent monitoring sites. There will be several elevations to monitor at each site.

Establish a series of quadrats within these zones to assess the composition, abundance andreproductive stage of the species. Using the species area curve method (Appendix 2), decide on thesize of the quadrat required and how many locations you require to adequately sample thepopulation in each zone. Once you have done this, it is important to replicate these quadratsurveys in zones found at the same elevations around the wetland.

When you select your sites, focus your survey on areas where the vegetation is growing or whereyou predict it will establish. If for example, the aim of your survey is to find out when there is adecrease in submerged vegetation abundance, you will need to select survey sites that cover arange of depths in the inundated section of the wetland. Ideally, each of the locations selected atyour first site should be leveled with a dumpy level and the sites selected at other locationssurveyed at the same elevation.

To accurately determine whether the abundance and life stage of vegetation in your wetland haschanged over time, you need to make sure your vegetation survey occurs at the same location. Fillin a site location sheet at each site and record the GPS position, or physically mark the beginningof your transect. Record the bearing of your transect survey to ensure your subsequent surveys aredone in the same direction.

Once the survey locations are established, there are different approaches to arranging quadratsand the technique adopted largely depends on the size of the zones identified. For vegetationzones covering broad bands within the wetland, establish a large quadrat (eg 5 X 10m) within theidentified zone and randomly assign smaller quadrats within the large quadrat (see Figure 3). Ifthe zone you are surveying is narrower than five metres, then the size of the large quadrat can bealtered providing these same dimensions are used in consequent surveys. In these cases, it is alsofeasible to establish a number of quadrats parallel to the shoreline (ensuring that you aresampling along the elevation gradient (Figure 4.)

your wetland - monitoring manual48

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 55: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Figure 3: Schematic diagram showing options for quadrat layout: quadrats are randomly allocatedwithin a defined area in the middle of the identified zone.

Figure 4: Schematic diagram showing quadrats parallel to the edge of the wetland.

There are a range of approaches available for determining the cover / abundance of vegetation inyour wetland. Cover categories for each species in your quadrat can be applied (as per Technique1) or real estimates of cover can be used. Real estimates involve allocating percent cover value toeach of the species in the quadrat, ie a plant covering half of the quadrat is equal to 50% cover(see Figure 5). When a species is non-continuous and is scattered throughout the quadrat, theestimates are more difficult. However, it does help if you sub-divide the quadrat into quadrantswith tape or wire to assist with accurate cover estimates. Assess the life stage of the species yourecord in the quadrat and record these on the data sheet (see Appendix 10).

your wetland - monitoring manual 49

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Randomlyallocated 1 x 1m2

quadrats

10 m

Quadrats:Establish parallel to the

edge of the wetland

Wetland edge

Wetland edge

Tape measure

Zone 1 Zone 2

Page 56: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Figure 5: Representation of cover estimates in a 1 X 1m2 quadrat

your wetland - monitoring manual50

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

1m

1m

50% cover

25% cover

Page 57: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 51

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

4.2 GROUNDWATER

BASELINE MONITORING

Groundwater gradient monitoring - Technique 6

ONGOING MONITORING

Groundwater gradients lens monitoring - Technique 7

Page 58: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual52

In the lower Murray area of South Australia, one of the most pressing environmental issues issalinity and while salt is a natural feature of this landscape, groundwater levels are now out ofbalance. When managing wetland water regimes in fragile floodplain environments such as these,it is essential to carefully consider the impacts of local groundwater levels on the salinity ofmanaged wetlands.

Little is known about the effect of drying wetlands on the groundwater in and around thewetland. Monitoring therefore becomes an invaluable tool for determining what processes mayimpact on your wetland and if your management has the potential to affect, or has affected thegroundwater patterns. These impacts could include saline seeps and/or the concentration of saltsin the basin of the wetland as groundwater is drawn to the surface via evaporation.

Groundwater processes are complex. A good general introduction to these groundwater processesis available in a short and easy to understand publication called A sketch of salt and watermovement in the Chowilla floodplain23. The publication summarises what is known about theimpacts of weirs on groundwater movement, groundwater aquifers and the impacts ofgroundwater on floodplain vegetation.

According to the Salinity Audit 5 000 EC is the distinction between fresh and saline water24. Atsalinities above 5 000 EC, biodiversity in wetlands is greatly reduced with more salt tolerant animaland plant species likely to become dominant 25. On the Chowilla floodplain, the health ofvegetation is at risk of degradation when groundwater salinities exceed 20 000 EC and thegroundwater levels are within four metres of the soil surface 23.

Where monitoring is being undertaken on reserves proclaimed under the following Acts ofParliament, a scientific permit is required from the BRS section of the Department of Environmentand Heritage (see Appendix 6).

The relevant Acts are the:• National Parks and Wildlife Act;• Wilderness Protection Act; and• Crown Lands Act.

A permit may also be required for digging holes on the floodplain. For more information contactthe Department of Water, Land and Biodiversity Conservation on 8463 6800.

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 59: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 53

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Baseline monitoring

GROUNDWATER GRADIENT MONITORING – TECHNIQUE 6Technique 6 is designed to answer the following questions:

What is the salinity and depth of groundwater around your wetland? Is there a gradient of groundwater to or from your wetland?

Information collected about the groundwater gradients leading to or from your wetland will helpyou understand the potential risks, if and when you dry your wetland. If, for example, you candetect large differences of over half a metre between the level of groundwater in your wetlandand the level of groundwater in the piezometers surrounding your wetland, a gradient or flow ofgroundwater to or from your wetland has most likely occurred. If you decide to dry a wetlandwhere the gradient or flow of groundwater towards it is strong (eg surrounding groundwaterlevels being significantly higher than those in the wetland), the wetland has the potential to act asa sink to the groundwater on drying. However, the amount of groundwater reaching the wetlanddepends largely on the nature of the sediments contained within it and the surrounding areas.26

For example, impermeable clay sediments are less likely to allow for ground water flow than morepermeable sands. On the other hand, if the groundwater levels in the wetland are significantlyhigher than the groundwater levels around the wetland, there is a potential for groundwater toflow away from your wetland 26. In either case, you will need to monitor closely the changes tothe groundwater levels and salinity. If you decide to dry your wetland, your monitoring strategyneeds to include a combination of Techniques 6 and 7.

Equipment required• Water quality data sheet (see Appendix 13);• Site location data sheet (see Appendix 3);• 50mm soil auger (with extensions);• Salinity meter;• Tape measure with weighted end to measure groundwater depth;• String with weighted jar to collect groundwater sample; • Thin wall 50mm PVC pipe to establish piezometers for monitoring groundwater depth (exact

length depends on how deep the groundwater is and how many you establish);• 50mm PVC pipe caps (with slits on the side) to cover each piezometers;• PVC pipe caps to fit inside the bottom of each piezometer. Drill approximately 5 X 2.5mm holes

in the bottom of the cap;• Trench fabric (permeable fabric that allows water to flow through it but blocks large

sediments);• Glass jars and insulation tape;• Survey equipment for levelling piezometers to AHD; and• Data sheets including site description (Appendix 3), soil log (Appendix 11) and water quality

data sheet (Appendix 13).

MethodsGroundwaterIt is difficult to describe a single foolproof technique for monitoring groundwater in wetlands asvery little is known about wetland / groundwater processes. Groundwater movement in the lowerRiver Murray is influenced by a combination of naturally occurring and human induced factorsincluding weirs, groundwater mounds, and soils. Each wetland is unique with its own complexnetwork of sedimentary layers of varying thickness and permeability 23.

Page 60: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual54

These sedimentary layers influence the depth and location of piezometers in your wetland. Themethods described below aim to provide you with enough information so that you can makedecisions about monitoring, once you start collecting data. With this method, you will need “to suckit and see”.

The number of sites you will need to monitor to understand the patterns of groundwater movementin your wetland depends on the amount of variation recorded once you start collecting data. Beginby establishing transects where you predict the gradient of groundwater through your wetland to begreatest (this is likely to be the shortest distance between the upland areas and the river). Start bypositioning a couple of piezometers between the wetland and the creek or river, and then betweenthe highlands and the wetland 27. Establishing two sites in different areas helps to record thevariation between sites and determine if there is a strong gradient between the highlands andwetland, and also the river and wetland. If the groundwater gradient differs then additionaltransects should be considered.

Each transect should include a series of piezometers perpendicular to the edge of the wetland. If thewetland is dry during the survey, piezometers need to be installed in the middle of the lake (seeTechnique 7). At each transect, begin by installing at least two piezometers, ten to thirty metresapart. The transect should start near the edge of the wetland and then move into the middle of thevegetation type, heading away from the centre of the wetland towards the floodplain 26,27. If theinitial results indicate there is a large difference between the water levels in these piezometers, youwill need to add piezometers to the transect to see if the readings represent a strong gradient ofgroundwater into or from the wetland. 27

NOTE: Employ a surveyor to ensure that the tops of the pipes are levelled to a standard height (ieAustralian Height Datum, AHD). This will allow the water levels in the piezometers to be compared toeach other and to the water level recorded in the river.

As groundwater and salinity levels slowly change, monitoring can occur relatively infrequently. Forexample, monitoring water level changes every one to three months and conductivity every three tosix months is probably adequate. 26 However, if large differences are recorded between surveys, thefrequency of monitoring should be increased. If you decide to manage a wetland where there arestrong groundwater gradients to or from the wetland, you will also need to increase the frequency ofmonitoring.

InstallationUse the following procedures to install the piezometers in your transect:• Use a 50mm soil auger to dig a hole until the top of the groundwater is reached. Ensure the auger

stem is kept vertical as it can not be corrected further down the hole 28. Continue this process sothe hole is at least one metre deeper than the groundwater. By this time you should have reachedthe Monoman Formation, a sand aquifer where the water table resided prior to river regulation 23.

• As you dig, measure and record the depth or thickness of each distinct layer of soil (eg clay, sandyclay, sand). This information helps you to understand better the groundwater results you collectand way the thickness of the impermeable clay layers will affect the recharge of fresh water intothe area surveyed. Fill in the soil log data sheet (Appendix 11). 26

• When you reach the sandy substrate of the Monoman Formation, continuing to dig will becomedifficult without the hole collapsing. If this is the case attach a tailor made cap with a hoseattachment to the top of the piezometer so that water can be pumped through the piezometer athigh pressure like a hose on a fire truck. The water pressure will enable you to force the pipe intothe sandy substrate.

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 61: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 55

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

• Piezometers usually consist of a length of 50mm PVC pipe with an end cap on the bottom ofthe pipe that fits snugly on the inside. Holes need to be drilled In the bottom cap, 5 X 2.5mm, prior to installation and the cap glued into the bottom of the PVC pipe. As aprecaution, attach the end cap using small self-tapping screws to ensure the end cap remains inplace when low pressure water is used on installation 27. When it is not critical to specificallytake water from the bottom of the pipe, the sides of the pipe can be slotted. Using a hack saw,the pipe can be slotted from the bottom of the pipe to approx 30cm up the side (ensuring theslots remain in the same substrate type).

• Wrap the base of the pipe in trench fabric (a fabric that allows water and fine particles to flowthrough and prevents larger particles from blocking the piezometer holes) and secure with selftapping screws and gaffa tape.

• If the pipe is not bottomed in a sandy substrate, using an 825 gram fruit can, pour in coarse,good clean cementing sand and position the pipe so that it sits firmly on the sand.

• Once the bottom of the pipe is installed at least 50 cm below the top of the groundwater, thepiezometer can be cut off about one metre above the ground. If you intend to monitor thepiezometers during a flood, the above ground section of the piezometer may need to beextended depending on the flood height. Piezometers should be protected from livestockrubbing against them and causing the PVC pipe to break off.

• Ensure that you pack clay around the base of the piezometer to prevent your sample beingcontaminated by rainfall or flood water seeping down the side of the pipe and into thegroundwater.

• Cover the piezometer with a PVC cap. Using a hacksaw, cut a slit in one side of the cap to makeit easier to put on and take off.

• Write the site name inside the cap and the piezometer tube with a permanent texta.• To compare the water levels in the wetland to the level of the groundwater, all locations need

to be surveyed into the Australian Height Datum (AHD).

Reading the piezometer• After installation, bail three times the volume of water out of the to ensure you retrieve a fresh

sample of water from the bottom. This will ensure you are not measuring the salinity of thewater used to install the pipe. Record the conductivity of the sample. Repeat this process untilyou record two consecutive readings the same.

• Allow the groundwater to seep back into the piezometer. Use a weighted tape measure torecord the water level in the pipe. Correct this measurement to AHD and repeat the processuntil you record identical, consecutive readings. It could take days or hours to reach equilibriumdepending on the permeability of the substrate.

• Keep the cap on at all times when not reading the piezometer. When you return to measurethe groundwater depth on the following survey, measure the water depth before you bail thewater out of the piezometer. Bailing is required if you want to measure conductivity. Thegeneral rule of thumb is to pump out about two to three standing volumes of water beforesampling. Remember to measure water depth first. The conductivity of the water sample isrecorded in EC units, or microsiemens per centimetre, µS/cm, and is measured using aconductivity meter. If the conductivity meter does not automatically convert the value, refer tothe instruments manual to find its value at the standard temperature of 25ºC. Enter the waterdepths and conductivity on the water quality monitoring data sheet (see Appendix 13).

Once you have collected the first data set, check to see if there are any strange or unexpectedresults. Be prepared for surprises! There have been cases on the Calperum floodplain where thegroundwater in the Monoman sand has been found to be relatively fresh at 15 000 EC 27,insteadof showing the expected high salinity readings of greater than 40 000 EC. You may also come

Page 62: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual56

across cases where impermeable layers of clay cause the groundwater levels to rise higher thanyou expect (eg higher than the level of the lake water). If you encounter responses that do notmatch your predictions, then you should investigate the site further by establishing morepiezometers to better understand the groundwater gradients within your wetland.

Remember to record the location of each piezometer on the site location data sheet (see Appendix 3).

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 63: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 57

Ongoing monitoring

GROUNDWATER GRADIENTS / LENS MONITORING - TECHNIQUE 7Technique 7 is designed to answer the following questions:

Do groundwater gradients and salinity change when you manage your wetland? Does the salinity and soil water content change when you manage your wetland?

When the wetland is dry, is there a lens above the regional groundwater under your wetland?

If so, how thick is the freshwaterlayer? Does the thickness and salinity of the lens change with duration of drying?

What is the salinity and water content of the soil in and around your wetland?

The data you collect using a combination of techniques 6 and 7 is going to help you avoidbreaking one of the golden rules: Do not salinise your wetland.

Both these techniques provide a means of identifying the early warning signs of salinisation andwhether or not any changes causing you concern can or cannot be fixed by altering themanagement of your water regime. For example, you may have decided to dry your wetland andsubsequently surveyed the groundwater under the wetland to find a thin layer of freshwater (eg50cm) occurring over the very saline regional groundwater. In a survey carried out three monthslater, the thickness of the freshwater lens has decreased to approximately 20cm. Your nextconsideration is to carefully assess how long you can dry the wetland before the layer is replacedby salty groundwater, as capillary action draws salts into the bed of the wetland. It has beensuggested that the duration of inundation can also affect the recharge of the freshwater layer.The piezometer in the lake can continue to be monitored through the wet stage, to assess therecharge of freshwater to the groundwater under the wetland.

By monitoring water levels in the piezometers established in the lake bed, you also gain a betterunderstanding of the interactions between the groundwater depth and the vegetation foundgrowing in and around the dry wetland bed. The groundwater depth influences the survival ofemergent vegetation and the types of dry wetland bed species that establish during the dry stage.Combined with the vegetation data collected from Section 4.1, this type of information helps youto piece together a bit more of the puzzle as you assess your water regime in light of the habitatobjectives you need to achieve.

Equipment requiredSee Technique 6.

MethodsWhen you dry and re-fill your wetland, continue to monitor the piezometers established inTechnique 6 for any major changes to groundwater gradients and salinity. Add to this network ofpiezometers by extending the transect into the middle of the dry wetland.

Collect soil from each of the sites and at the depths collected previously, to compare the soilsalinity and water content.

Monitoring groundwater in Lake Merreti has shown that the thickness of the freshwater lens isnot necessarily uniform across the wetland bed 27. The thickness of the freshwater lens in your

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 64: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual58

wetland will also vary, as it depends on the complex layering of the permeable and impermeablelayers of sediments. An electromagnetic conductivity (EM) meter commonly used in agriculturesuch as those in the Geonics range (http://www.geonics.com/) can be used to identify the areas ofwetland where there are different types of soil and saltwater content 26. By selecting several siteswhere the electromagnetic readings are different you can initiate a starting point for siteselection. Alternatively, selecting sites randomly and spread spatially across the wetland would bea good place to start.

When monitoring the changes to groundwater during drying and re-filling, the frequency ofmonitoring needs to be relatively high. At the start, collect lots of information. You canconfidently reduce or increase the monitoring frequency at a later date, depending on the amountof change recorded. A good initial approach is to monitor groundwater depths every month andconductivity every three months after filling and drying. If minor changes are recorded, the keytimes for monitoring are prior to re-filling a wetland and prior to drying. This gives you theinformation you need to assess the net effect of the previous management stage (ie filling ordrying).

To assess the thickness of the freshwater lens in your wetland, it is necessary to establish a series ofpiezometers at each of your chosen sites. Installation is similar to that described in Technique 6.However, you will need to install a series of piezometers at different depths into the wetland bed.Water sampling can then be carried out from a specific location in the aquifer to determine ifthere is fresh or saline water under the wetland. If the water is fresh, you will need to keepadding piezometers, increasing the depth each time. This technique determines where thegroundwater changes from fresh to saline, and therefore the thickness of the freshwater lens. Thenumber of piezometers and the depth of installation depend largely upon the initial results yourecord. For example, if freshwater is first recorded two metres below the surface and then youinstall another piezometer five metres below the surface and find the groundwater turns salty,you should add in extra piezometers between these depths. Additional piezometers can then beused to determine where the groundwater changes from fresh to saline, and consequently thethickness of the freshwater lens.

To determine how the groundwater is affecting the sediments of the lake bed and whether or notflood duration is affecting the salinity and moisture content of the soil, collect soil samples at eachlocation as described in Technique 6, Installation.

Data can be recorded on the water quality monitoring data sheet (see Appendix 13).

Record the location of the piezometers on a site location data sheet (see Appendix 3).

Each time you visit the wetland and measure the groundwater depth, fill in the management logdata sheet (see Appendix 14). Record the groundwater depth more frequently when you observechanges to the water levels, particularly during drying and re-filling.

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 65: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 59

SOIL SALINITY

If you intend on changing the water regime of your wetland and surrounding areas, it isimportant to consider not only how this will affect groundwater levels and salinities but alsohow these changes will influence the soil water / salt content. These parameters stronglyinfluence the health of long-lived vegetation and also the composition and health ofunderstorey plant communities.

Combining soil salinity measures with information about groundwater salinities and levels canbe very useful for assessing the effect of increased duration of flooding and or drying wetlands. For example, in areas where the period of inundation has increased, you would expect areduction in the salinities recorded in the soil profile and possibly a gradient of freshness thatreduces as you go down the soil profile.

You will also be able to work out the relative influence of groundwater on surface soil salinitiesfrom the soil profile information.

At sites where you intend to change the frequency and/or duration of drying or wetting, collectsoil samples for analysis of water content and soil salinity. Simple analysis of soil salinity can beundertaken in soil analysis laboratories using a 1:5 soil to water mix. However, it is important toknow the exact amount of water and soil used in the analysis, in order to calculate the salinitiesthat will affect floodplain plants. This is called the gravimetric water content (Appendix 12) 29.Samples can be collected and transported in snap lock bags for this analysis.

An additional analysis that can be done on soil samples is matrix suction analysis. This analysiswill tell you where the ‘wetting front’ is within your soil profile which in turn helps you todetermine the depth of influence during any given flooding event. This technique is useful inconjunction with tree health assessment when attempting to work out reasons for tree healthstatus. For matrix suction analysis you are required to collect substantial samples of soil in a jamjar and seal it with gaffa tape.

To identify the area of flood influence and salinities within your soil you need to take samplesdown the soil profile. Samples should be retrieved most frequently in the upper sections of thesoil profile and at every 10-20cm in the first metre. The samples can then be taken lessfrequently 20-40cm further down the soil profile extending down to the watertable 29.

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 66: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual60

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 67: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 61

4.3 SURFACE WATER

BASELINE MONITORING

Surface water sampling - Technique 8

ONGOING MONITORING

Surface water sampling - Technique 9

Water level monitoring – Technique 10

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 68: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Water quality changes rapidly in response to a number of influences, and consequently is a highlyvariable parameter over time. Influences affecting water quality include animals such as yabbiesworking the sediment surface, groundwater seeps, wind speed and direction, and the quality ofthe water source. With this wide range of influences, it is possible for a single wetland to maintaina wide range of water quality values over time. When establishing water quality monitoring sitesin a wetland, it is important to consider the amount of variation that occurs between sites. If yourpilot study showed a high level of variation, you need to add more sites to compensate for this.Values recorded across sites can then provide a more representative range of water quality valuesacross the wetland.

Salinity, turbidity, temperature and dissolved oxygen are the focus of surface water monitoring asthey are responsible for influencing the growth, reproduction and survival of plants and animals inwetlands (see the complementary document Your Wetland: Supporting information Chapter 1).Changing the hydrology of wetlands can have a profound affect on these parameters, therebymaking it extremely important to monitor water quality before and after management. It is alsoimportant to monitor water quality in combination with other parameters as they may be used tohelp explain biological responses.

If monitoring is to be undertaken on reserves proclaimed under some Acts of Parliament, ascientific permit is required from the BRS section of the Department of Environment and Heritage(see Appendix 6).

These Acts are the:• National Parks and Wildlife Act; • Wilderness Protection Act; and • Crown Lands Act.

your wetland - monitoring manual62

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 69: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 63

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Baseline monitoring

SURFACE WATER SAMPLING - TECHNIQUE 8Technique 8 recommends basic water quality monitoring techniques to answer the followingquestion:

What is the water quality in your wetland prior to management?

This technique gives an indication of water quality recorded in a wetland prior to management.Provided the appropriate equipment is available, it helps to focus on measuring salinity, turbidityand dissolved oxygen levels in order to develop an understanding and knowledge of the levelsrecorded prior to management.

Equipment required• Site location data sheet (see Appendix 3);• Water quality monitoring data sheet (see Appendix 13);• Water quality monitoring machine / equipment (salinity and dissolved oxygen);• Salinity standards to calibrate machine;• Distilled water to rinse probe;• Stick for measuring water depth;• Turbidity tube or automated turbidity machine;• Clean plastic bottles; and• Waders / boat.

MethodsA range of resources is available for working out how to use the water quality equipment youchoose. Each instrument will come with a user manual and for the equipment recommended byWaterwatch there are a range of standard approaches to sample collection and analysis (contactyour local Waterwatch coordinator for more information).

Establishing sitesOnce you are familiar with using the water quality monitoring equipment, work out how manysites you require to adequately sample the water quality in your wetland and select your sitesrandomly (see Appendix 2). It may be that you establish a water monitoring site in each of thehabitats being addressed with macroinvertebrate or fish monitoring. To determine the relativeinfluence of the water source on the wetland’s water quality, a sample should also be taken in thefeeder creek upstream and downstream of the wetland inlet.

Frequency of monitoringRecording water quality in late summer gives you an indication of the ‘higher’ end of salinityvalues that occur in your wetland but it is also important to understand the natural variations inwater quality that occur seasonally. This information provides you with a basis for evaluatingfuture water quality measures against the higher end of the salinity range and against the overallrange of salinity measures recorded during the year. Remember to take your sample from exactlythe same depth in the water column during each survey, as the water quality varies through thewater column.

Turbidity, dissolved oxygen and temperature readings should be recorded at the same time as thesalinity measurements. Repeated measurements of turbidity, approximately four at each site, arerequired if you want to increase the accuracy of your results. It is important to take repeated

Page 70: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

measures - manual turbidity measures using a turbidity tube can be subjective and are dependenton light conditions on the day and digital turbidity machines tend to fluctuate widely.

Sampling protocolTake your water quality reading in the open water to remove any potential edge effects (forexample, higher salinities due to rainfall washing salts from the land into the wetland). If you haveautomated instruments to take your water quality readings in situ, make sure the turbidity isrecorded well away from the area where you are affecting the sediment surface. A boat is ideal inthis situation. If you do not have an automated turbidity instrument, collect a sample of waterusing a clean plastic bottle. As you approach your site, collect some water and rinse the bottle byshaking it vigorously and then emptying it. Once you arrive at your site, hold the water bottleapproximately 30cm below the water surface and allow the water to bubble into the bottleensuring that surface scums and floating water plants do not find their way into the samplingbottle. Where water depth prevents you from collecting a sample from the middle of yourwetland, attach a sample bottle to a broomstick to give you necessary reach to sample under theseconditions.

Record water depth at each survey site as this information assists in the interpretation of your datawhen trying to determine whether or not your wetland was affected by evaporation at the timeof the survey.

Fill in the details on the water quality data sheet (see Appendix 13), remembering to take note ofthe prevailing weather conditions such as wind strength which has a significant effect on theturbidity of shallow wetlands. Also, record any other influences that may affect the water qualityof the wetland on the day of the survey.

You need to make sure you fill out a site location data sheet so that each time you survey, youreturn to the same sites (see Appendix 3).

your wetland - monitoring manual64

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 71: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 65

Ongoing monitoring

SURFACE WATER SAMPLING - TECHNIQUE 9Technique 9 follows on from Technique 8 and is designed to answer the following question:

What range of water quality values are recorded in your wetland after management?

By using the methods presented in Technique 8, you can assess whether the water quality valuesyou record after management are higher than those recorded before management. If you knowthe range of water quality values recorded in other similar wetlands and also understand thetolerances of different plants and animals, you can also determine when the values areapproaching levels sufficient to cause concern (see Your Wetland: Supporting Information). Again,recording the water quality of the feeder creek helps you to interpret your results and eventuallywork out what are the relative influences of the ‘source’ water on the salinity levels recorded inyour wetland.

Data can be recorded on the water quality monitoring data sheet (see Water Quality, Appendix 13)

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 72: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

WATER LEVEL MONITORING - TECHNIQUE 10Technique 10 outlines a standard method for keeping management and water level records thatrelate to your wetland:

How do groundwater and surface water levels fluctuate within your wetland?

In answering this question, the options for water level management in your wetland are betterunderstood and the water regime tolerances of different species of plants can be worked out moreaccurately.

It is important to understand your water management options, especially when water is one of thekey management tools used in wetland management. The rate of filling and drying for example,depends on the conditions prevailing in the river or creek that feeds the wetland. Whilst it isdifficult to predict how quickly a wetland might fill, it is easier to estimate a time frame for fillingand drying rates when conditions are similar. Recording the conditions that surround the drying orfilling event will help make these future estimates easier.

Fluctuating water levels, and the filling and drying rates that occur within the wetland affect theabundance and type of plants that grow there. By collecting water level data in conjunction withphotopoints and vegetation surveys (Techniques 2, 3, 4, and 5), you can determine which types ofplants are favoured by different water regimes. This type of information provides you with anotherpiece in the puzzle as you begin to work out what it is you need to do with water regimemanagement to achieve your habitat objectives.

Equipment required:• Management log data sheet (see Appendix 14);• Tape measure to measure water depth, if permanent gauge boards are not in your wetland; and• Permanent gauge boards or star dropper to measure surface water depth.

MethodsTo monitor surface water levels, establish a permanent depth marker in the deepest part of yourwetland. Locate additional markers in areas where water will inundate the edges during floodingperiods. Make sure these markers are facing in a direction where the water level can be read fromthe shoreline.

Gauge boards in the feeder creek are also important as a means of recording the differences inwater levels between the wetland and creek, and to indicate the potential water levels a wetlandmay contain.

In wetlands where flow control structures have been established on the inlet, gauge boardserected on both sides are very useful for assessing the head loss over the structure. You need toposition the gauge boards in close proximity to the structure while making sure you choose an areanot influenced by the presence of the structure.

Your water level marker can be as simple or elaborate as you can afford. An enamel coated metalgauge board showing 1cm increments is ideal. It is best to have the boards accurately leveled intothe Australian Height Datum (AHD) as this widens your scope for comparing the level of yourwetland to levels recorded on the river at each of the weirs and at several other locations alongthe River Murray. Establishing a less elaborate star dropper at the deepest point can also answerthe question posed for this technique. However, it will not be possible to read these droppers from

your wetland - monitoring manual66

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 73: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 67

a distance and you may have to physically measure the depth of the water with a tape measureeach time you visit the wetland.

It is also useful to establish a permanent gauge board in the creek or river adjacent to yourwetland inlet. Once again, if you can level the gauge board to AHD you increase your scope forcomparing the water depth in the wetland to the water level in the creek. This information givesyou an idea of what the conditions were like in the creek or river when you achieved a certainrate of filling. Having this information adds to your knowledge of how the wetland operates andhelps you to understand better the options for management.

Each time you visit the wetland, record the surface or groundwater depth in the wetland andcreek. Fill in the management data sheet (see Appendix 14) ensuring that all fields are completed.Record water depth more frequently to coincide with the times when the management of thewetland is changing, and especially when filling and drying or partial drying occurs. Depending onthe rate of filling, recording water depth may range from a daily through to a weekly event. Oncethe water levels stabilise, water depth can be recorded less frequently on a monthly or twomonthly basis. The more information you can collect about water levels in your wetland, the moreyou can begin to understand your management options. Ideally, and only where resources permit,data loggers could be installed to automatically log water depth readings more than once a day.

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 74: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual68

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 75: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

4.4 FISH

BASELINE MONITORING

Combination A - Technique 11

ONGOING MONITORING

Combination B -Technique 12

your wetland - monitoring manual 69

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 76: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

It is probable that permanent wetlands have permanent localised fish communities that do notundergo immigration or emigration 30. There are also likely to be fish that do migrate betweenpermanent wetlands and the main stream. For this reason, changing the water regime ofpermanent wetlands is likely to significantly alter the make up of the fish community within thewetland.

Fish rely on a range of aquatic resources for their survival including adequate water quality, anabundance of micro and macroinvertebrates and a range of different habitats. Information aboutfish communities in wetlands can therefore tell you a lot about the health and condition of theaquatic environment.

There are a range of fishing techniques used by researchers to survey a wide range of fish habitatsand size classes. The type of gear you decide to use depends largely on the type of habitats youare surveying and the focus of your question (see Appendix 15).

Key references for fish identification are outlined in Table 5. For confirmation of species, the SAMuseum identifies specimens if you can provide a well preserved sample. The preferred way ofpreserving fish involves euthanising them in an 11% Bennet’s solution (mixing 50% glycol and50% formaldehyde) and then storing them in 70% ethanol for identification later on. If you havedifficulty in obtaining these ingredients, preservation in an 80:20 methylated spirits to water mixpreserves the fish adequately. Native Fish Australia (SA) also offers a free identification service.Simply take a couple of photos of the fish, preferably side on, and email it through [email protected] As you find new species it is extremely important to get confirmation ontheir identification. It is also important to periodically check your identifications for accuracy bypreserving specimens or sending photographs of the fish you catch.

Permits are required from the Department of Primary Industries and Resources SA (Fisheries) toundertake research involving fish (see Appendix 6).

Table 5: References for fish identification

your wetland - monitoring manual70

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Comment s

Excellent reference with taxonomy,clear descriptions, colourphotographs and or diagram foreach fish, presently unable to bepurchased.

Good reference with taxonomic key,clear descriptions with diagnosis,some species have diagrams, allspecies have photographs.

Flyer with good descriptions andcolour photos of fish species foundin the River Murray and Mount LoftyRanges.

Title

Fishes of South-eastern Australia

Field guide to fishes of Australia

Fishes of the Mt Lofty Ranges,Part B, Murray Darling Basin in SA

Sourcerefer to reference

31

32

33

Author

McDowall

Allen

Hammer and Butler

Page 77: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Baseline monitoring

COMBINATION A – TECHNIQUE 11Technique 11 baseline fish monitoring is designed to answer the following questions:

What species make up the fish community in your wetland? Do you have any threatened species of fish?

In what abundances do all species occur?

This technique provides a snapshot of the types of fish resident in your wetland. It recommendsusing a range of fishing methods to ensure your survey picks up the range of species inhabitingyour wetland. Fishing methods include: fine mesh fyke nets with 8.5mm mesh, baited shrimp traps,dip nets with 7 to 10mm mesh, and seine nets with 10mm mesh.

Equipment required• 8.5mm mesh fyke nets (number required depends on the number of sites);• Two large poles per net;• One foam float per net;• Shrimp traps / dry bait (eg dog biscuits), number required depends on the number of sites;• 10 metre long seine net with 10mm mesh size;• Long handled dip net with 7 to10mm mesh;• Measuring device (eg ruler or tape measure);• Fish monitoring data sheets (see Appendix 16);• Site location data sheets (see Appendix 3);• Specimen jars, note paper, pencil, 80:20 mix of methylated spirits to water for specimen

preservation; and• Camera to photograph fish for identification.

MethodsFish diversity and abundance changes seasonally and in response to different river conditionsincluding flooding conditions or entitlement flows. Ideally, to identify the fish using your wetland,several surveys need to be undertaken during spring / summer and autumn as well as duringdifferent river conditions, for example, when over bank flooding occurs. However, if this is beyondthe resource constraints of your project, or if ‘different’ river conditions do not occur beforemanagement, it is advisable to schedule your baseline fish survey when fish abundance anddiversity is known to be highest, ie during spring / summer through to autumn 34, 35, 36. If youundertake a single series of surveys avoid surveying at times when conditions are out of theordinary, like over-bank flooding. It is also advisable for you to do repeat surveys at the same siteover a period of four consecutive days.

Some small fish have shown strong associations with certain habitats 37 and for this reason, it isimportant to set nets in the range of habitats identified in your wetland. Using the methodsoutlined in Appendix 2 for locating sites, randomly select locations using a minimum of four sitesfor your nets within each of the identified habitats. Seek expert advice on site location and thesampling effort required to ensure accurate and representative data is being collected.

Different fishing gear is effective under different conditions. For example, when surveying invegetated and non-vegetated areas, you may need to use different types of fishing gear fordifferent times of the year, and especially during flooding and non flooding periods whendifferent habitats become inundated.

your wetland - monitoring manual 71

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 78: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

The following fishing methods should be used in combination to ensure that data (for comparingthrough time) can still be collected, even though conditions may prevent you from using somekinds of gear (see Technique 12).

Fyke netsFyke nets should be set with the leader perpendicular to the edge of the wetland (see Figure 6).Ensure that a foam float is in the end of the net to hold part of the net above the water. Thisallows turtles to surface and get air if they are caught in the net during the survey. Leave the netsin the wetland for twelve hours from late afternoon to early morning. This will ensure you collectfish during dawn, dusk and night.

Figure 6: Diagram showing the method for setting fyke nets in a wetland.

Shrimp trapsShrimp traps are set over dawn, dusk and night, the same time period as the fyke nets. Bait thetraps with dry dog food and then situate them among emergent and submerged vegetation.Ensure that you flag their location adequately so they can be easily found the following morning.

Dip netDip netting is a useful technique in areas where water is shallow and/or contains vegetation,therefore making it too difficult to apply other trapping methods. Using a relatively large meshsize of 7 to 10mm allows the net to be dipped and dragged through the water rapidly, increasingthe chances of catching fish.

Ideally this sampling method is undertaken during dawn and dusk when fish are known to bemost active 34. However, this may be impractical if the available time frame is short and if othernets are being set and retrieved around this time. Record the time of day when the first survey isundertaken (and during consequent surveys) to ensure this technique is used at the same time.

During the first survey, it is also important to record the sampling effort and the habitat beingsampled. The sampling effort is based on the length of time spent sampling and the distance overwhich the sampling has occurred, for example 20 metres in two minutes. Recording these detailsmeans you can duplicate your previous sampling effort during subsequent surveys and the datacan be compared (see Technique 12).

Seine netSeine nets are used in wetlands where there are areas of relatively shallow yet open water aboutone to two metres deep and along the edge of emergent vegetation. This technique is ineffectivein areas densely covered in submerged plants and logs and can be difficult if used in wetlands withextremely soft sediments.

your wetland - monitoring manual72

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Foam float

Wetland edge

Fyke net leader

Page 79: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

The seine netting technique involves dragging the net between two people for a set distance at aset distance apart. These details need to be recorded to ensure consequent surveys can repeat thesame amount of survey effort. It is important to ensure the weighted rope attached to the netstays on the sediment surface of the wetland. This is achieved by both holding and standing onthe bottom rope as it is dragged through the water. Once the seine drag is complete, the net isdragged to the edge of the wetland where the connection between the net and the sedimentsurface is maintained at all times. The fish then need to be sorted out from the debris in the netand processed as outlined below.

As with dip netting, ideally seine netting should occur during dawn and dusk when fish are attheir most active. However, this may be impractical if the time frame in which to complete thesesurveys is shorter. Record the time of day when your first survey is undertaken to ensureconsequent surveys use this technique at the same time.

Processing the catchEmpty the contents of the net into a bucket of water, then identify and count each individual.Remember to handle, process and dispose of fish ethically. To do this, avoid physical stressors whenprocessing the catch:• Keep the bucket in the shade;• Process the catch quickly;• Process the catch with wet hands; and• When preserving fish, put them in the metho:water solution quickly.

Exotic species should also be disposed of ethically. Ensure they are killed quickly and humanely anddisposed of discretely at the edge of the wetland, eg in the reeds.

Special care should be taken in areas where a threatened species of fish has previously beenrecorded or is predicted to occur. Finding out this information before beginning your fish survey iscritical. In cases such as these, it is important to seek expert assistance when processing the catch.

Accidental death of fish can occur during a fish survey. If this occurs, preserve one of each speciesto increase the museum records on fish distribution.

To get a better understanding of the fish population dynamics in your wetland, you can alsomeasure your catch and take note of their condition. This information is not needed to answer thequestion outlined above. NOTE: If you intend on using this data as a basis for answering thequestions in Technique 12 then you need to collect this information.

If you decide to measure the fish, only measure a sub sample of your catch as this allows you tosample more sites using a range of techniques. Select the sub sample by reaching into your bucketand randomly selecting 20 individuals of each species. Record the condition and length of the 20fish in your sub sample. If there are more than 20 individuals of each species you can tally theremainder of the fish to get an overall count 34, 38, but if there are less than 20 individuals,measure all the fish. Try to keep the handling of the fish to a minimum to reduce the potential forstress and to increase the chances of returning the native fish to the system.

If you have a permit to take specimens from your catch, photograph or preserve an example ofeach species for expert confirmation of species identification. To avoid impacting on what may bea threatened species, limit the number of fish preserved at your site. It is recommended by theDepartment of Primary Industries and Resources (Fisheries) that a maximum of five fish of any

your wetland - monitoring manual 73

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 80: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

species per location should be taken for species identification.

Record this information on the Fish monitoring data sheet (see Appendix 16). Remember to recordthe trapping method on the data sheet and to fill out a separate data sheet for each of thedifferent nets you use or dip netting effort. Describe the habitat where the net is situated on thesite location data sheet to ensure you return to the correct habitat type in consequent surveys (seeAppendix 3).

Other informationFish communities are influenced by any number of factors including river flows, water quality,habitat availability and food resources. Sampling for fish at the same time as you sample for otherparameters outlined in this monitoring manual assists in the interpretation of the fish datacollected.

your wetland - monitoring manual74

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 81: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Ongoing monitoring

COMBINATION B – TECHNIQUE 12Technique 12 is designed to answer the following questions:

What species make up the fish community in your wetland and in what abundances do they occur?

How does the community of fish change after management?

The data you collect using Technique 11 can be used as a basis for measuring changes to the fishpopulation after management. Repeated surveys need to be undertaken in exactly the same wayand in exactly the same site locations for the data to be comparable.

Equipment requiredSee Technique 11.

MethodsIf you intend on using the data collected in your fish baseline survey to assess how the fishcommunities change after management, then it is important to record information about thecondition and size of the fish during the baseline survey (see Technique 11). The size and conditionof the fish you sample enables you to develop a picture of how the fish community changes overtime, and if there is recruitment to the wetland or a shift in the health of the fish recorded.

To make this data comparable with the data collected in the baseline survey, it is important torepeat the survey at the same sites using:• No less than four sites during the survey; • The same time frame to set nets for the same duration; and • Active sampling techniques such as dip netting at the same time in the day.

It is advisable to do repeat surveys at the same site on four consecutive days. Surveys repeated inthe spring, summer autumn and winter months of each year give a good indication of how thefish population changes over time.

your wetland - monitoring manual 75

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 82: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual76

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 83: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

4.5 MACROINVERTEBRATES

BASELINE MONITORING

Dip net survey A - Technique 13

ONGOING MONITORING

Dip net survey B - Technique 14

your wetland - monitoring manual 77

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 84: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

A macroinvertebrate is an aquatic organism without a backbone that is greater than 1mm inlength and is therefore large enough to see without a microscope. Macroinvertebrates are knownto respond to changes in water regime in wetlands 39 and are recognised for their value asindicators of river health 13. After a three year study in the wetlands of the lower Murray, theidentification of macroinvertebrates to family level revealed a relationship between broad scalechanges to community structure and hydrological changes 35.

Processing macroinvertebrate samples can be costly. Unless you can devote the large amount oftime it takes to identify them accurately, expert help is the only option for correct speciesidentification. When the water regime of your wetland is changed due to a change inmanagement, the types of macroinvertebrates inhabiting your wetland may also change. Despitethe cost of identification, you will need to know what groups of macroinvertebrates are affected.Where time constraints do not allow you to accurately identify macroinvertebrates to family level,you can always begin the process by collecting and sorting the samples in preparation foridentification by experts.

There is a range of methods used to collect macroinvertebrates and the method you choosedepends on the type of macroinvertebrates you wish to target in your monitoring program. If forexample you are most interested in adult macroinvertebrates, you need to construct emergenttraps that float on the surface of the water to catch the macroinvertebrates as they emerge fromtheir larval stage. Some of the more common methods used to monitor macroinvertebrates aresummarised in Appendix 17.

Key references for macroinvertebrate identification are outlined in Table 6. There are noreferences that comprehensively cover all family groups of macroinvertebrates found in the lowerRiver Murray but these references can help you start to recognise the different types ofmacroinvertebrates in your wetland. If you are attempting to identify your macroinvertebrates tofamily level you need to source more scientific keys. You may also need some assistance fromWaterwatch coordinators and experts at the Australian Water Quality Centre.

If monitoring is to be undertaken on reserves proclaimed under Acts of Parliament, a scientificpermit is required from the BRS section of the Department of Environment and Heritage (seeAppendix 6).

These Acts include:• National Parks and Wildlife Act;• Wilderness Protection Act; and• Crown Lands Act.

your wetland - monitoring manual78

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 85: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Table 6: Key references for identification of macroinvertebrates

your wetland - monitoring manual 79

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Comments

Clear colour photographs ofmacroinvertebrates, useful forcommon species in the Lower MurrayDarling Basin, not all family groupsfound in this area are presented inthis reference.

Clear diagrams, with descriptionsand keys for common species foundin the Lower Murray Darling Basin.

Comprehensive and accurateidentification guide for bothprofessionals and non professionals.It contains an easy to use key to allthe macroinvertebrates and highquality colur photographs of livespecimins.

Contains diagnostic key to differentorders.

Contains good clear diagrams ofmacroinvertebrates

Title

Colour guide to invertebrates ofAustralian inland waters

Aquatic life in ponds

A guide to freshwatermacroinvertebrates of temperateAustralia

Australian Life

Invertebrates

Sourcerefer to reference

40

41

42

43

44

Author

Hawking and Smith

Ingram et. al.

Gooderham & Tsyril

Williams

Miller

Page 86: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Baseline monitoring

DIP NET SURVEY A – TECHNIQUE 13Technique 13 in baseline monitoring is designed to answer the following questions:

What species make up the macroinvertebrate community in your wetland? Do you have any threatened species of macroinvertebrates?

In what abundances do they occur?

This technique provides a snapshot of the types of macroinvertebrates resident in your wetland. Itrecommends using a fine mesh dip net as an effective method of collecting macroinvertebrates inlarval and pupal stages and also the adults of beetles, bugs and crustaceans.

Equipment required• 250µm mesh dip net with a 20 X 30cm opening;• Preserving jars, you can re-cycle jam jars if they have a tight seal (number of jars required will

depend on the number of sites you survey);• Site location data sheets (see Appendix 3);• Plastic jug or cup;• 80:20 mix of methylated spirits to water for specimen preservation (the amount required will

depend on the number of sites surveyed;• Permanent texta, small pieces of paper; and• Sub sampler made of small vials, plastic container and mesh grill (see Appendix 18).

MethodsMacroinvertebrate diversity and abundance changes seasonally and under a range of differentriver conditions and management stages. These may include high river flows and/or filling ordrying of your wetland. To ensure you record and identify the types of macroinvertebratesinhabiting your wetland, ideally you need to undertake several surveys during each of the seasonsas well as during different river conditions (eg over-bank flooding). However, if this is beyond theresource constraints of your project or if ‘different’ river conditions do not occur beforemanagement, just focus on surveys during spring / summer and autumn. If you intend toundertake a single survey, take care not to survey when conditions are out of the ordinary, whenthere is over-bank flooding, for example.

Different types of macroinvertebrates are known to inhabit different types of vegetation 45. Toensure your survey picks up the range of different species of macroinvertebrates resident in yourwetland, you will also need to survey a range of habitats. Using the methods outlined in Appendix 2 for locating sites within a wetland, randomly select your sites for dip netting withineach of the different habitats you have identified, for a minimum of four sites.

Dip netting must be done in a standard way at each site so that the data collected is comparable.One standard approach to dip netting is to dip your net into all of the different types ofvegetation present at your site over a set distance of ten metres. The amount of effort in eachvegetation type should be proportionate to the area covered by that plant (eg if half of the area isribbon weed and the other half typha, 5m of dipping should occur in each of these areas). Dipnetting involves prodding the net into the vegetation or dragging it along in the open water toallow the macroinvertebrates to fall into the bottom of the net. If you hold the net horizontal tothe water surface there is less chance of collecting large amounts of aquatic vegetation in your

your wetland - monitoring manual80

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 87: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

net. Avoid collecting samples from three to five centimetres above the sediment surface to preventbenthic macroinvertebrates, which live in the sediment, from being collected rather than thosethat live in the water column.

Once dipping is completed, follow the process below: • Wash your catch into the corner of the net (from the outside) using a plastic cup or jug;• Deposit the macroinvertebrates in the jar making sure all individuals are removed from the net; • Cover the sample with the methylated sprits / water mix of 80:20;• Ensure the site code and date are clearly marked on the lid and the jar with a permanent

texta; and • Using a pencil, record the site name and date on a small piece of paper and insert it in the jar.

Record the location and habitat type you surveyed on the site location data sheets (see Appendix 3).

Once the samples have been collected, set up a sub-sampling system to count and identify aproportion of the catch (this is particularly useful when there is a large number ofmacroinvertebrates). One method used involves sub-sampling 10% of the catch at a time until aminimum of 200 individuals is selected. The remainder of the sample is then checked for rarespecies not retrieved during the sub-sampling process (refer to the sub-sampler construction anduse outlined in Appendix 18). Sub-sampling is a great way to separate the debris from themacroinvertebrates and can save time and therefore money during the identification stage.

Identification of macroinvertebrates into species and family level requires a high degree ofexpertise and time. Counting and identifying the species present may need to be outsourcedand/or adequately resourced in some other way.

your wetland - monitoring manual 81

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 88: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Ongoing monitoring

DIP NET SURVEY B – TECHNIQUE 14Technique 14 in ongoing monitoring is designed to answer the following questions:

What species make up the macroinvertebrate community in your wetland and in what abundances do they occur?

How does the population of macroinvertebrates change after management?

The data you collect using Technique 13 can be used as a basis for measuring changes to themacroinvertebrate population after management. Repeat surveys need to be undertaken in exactlythe same way for the data to be comparable.

Equipment requiredSee Technique 13.

MethodsIt is important to ensure the data you collect is comparable with the data you collected in thebaseline survey. This is achieved simply by repeating the survey at the same sites (using a minimum offour sites) over the same time frame. Surveys in spring, summer and autumn months of each yearprovide a good indication of how the macroinvertebrate population changes over time. Compare theresults with data collected in other studies and relate them to changes in habitat, water quality, thesource of the water entering the wetland (eg if water is being delivered from the River Murray orDarling River), and the time of the year.

Record that you collected macroinvertebrate samples on the water quality data sheet in Appendix 13.

your wetland - monitoring manual82

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 89: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

4.6 MAMMALS AND REPTILES

BASELINE MONITORING

Pitfalls and trapping A - Technique 15

ONGOING MONITORING

Pitfalls and trapping B - Technique 16

your wetland - monitoring manual 83

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 90: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Sourcerefer to reference

49

50

51

Increasing the duration of flooding in wetlands that are usually dry for two to ten years betweenflood events has the potential to alter the habitats of small mammals and reptiles that normallyinhabit the cracking or self mulching clay soils of temporary wetlands. Conversely, the drying ofwetlands that are usually permanent has the potential to create cracking clay habitats suitable forthese species. Managing wetland hydrology therefore has the potential to affect the number anddiversity of resident mammal and reptile populations.

In floodplain wetlands of the lower River Murray, mouse-sized marsupials including the PaucidentPlanigale (Planigale gilesi), Fat tailed dunnart (Sminthopsis crassicaudata) and the Commondunnart (Sminthopsis murina) have been recorded on the Chowilla floodplain in the dry crackingclay basin of Werta Wert Lagoon 46 47. The Planigale and Fat tailed dunnart have also beenrecorded more recently on the Thookle Lagoon on Calperum Station 47. Little is known about thegeneral ecology of these species, as well as their movements in and out of flooded and recentlydried lakes 48. If mammal and reptile populations are present on your wetland bed, monitor themclosely, especially if you intend implementing a new hydrological management regime. The datacollected can then be used to ensure a change in the water regime does not compromise thehabitats (and subsequently the survival) of these species. Different techniques used to survey smallmammals and reptiles are outlined in Appendix 19.

Fauna surveys require scientific permits and animal ethics approval (see Appendix 6). Obtainingpermits is difficult without previous experience in undertaking such surveys, therefore experts inthe field of fauna surveys are an essential requirement if your fauna survey is to be expertlymanaged. Standard methods for vertebrate surveys have been developed by National Parks andWildlife SA and guidelines including data sheets and standard procedures are outlined inGuidelines for vertebrate surveys in South Australia 1. Some of these standard approaches havebeen summarised here to provide an indication of what is involved when surveying mammals andreptiles.

Key references for mammal and reptile identification are outlined in Table 7. Your catch requiresyou to have local experts who can verify the identification and who have access to otheridentification resources such as museum keys.

Table 7: Key references for identification of mammals and reptiles

your wetland - monitoring manual84

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Comments

Pictorial reference with clear colourphotographs and diagrams. Containsidentification key with goodglossary. Technical reference.

Basic field identification book withartist impressions of animals, cleardescriptions and distribution maps.

Descriptive reference with colourphotographs and information aboutthe ecology of the species.

Title

Reptiles and Amphibians ofAustralia

A field guide to the Mammals ofAustralia

The Mammals of Australia

Author

Cogger

Menkhorst andKnight

Strahan

Page 91: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Baseline monitoring

PITFALLS AND TRAPPING A – TECHNIQUE 15Technique 15 is designed to answer the following questions:

What mammal and reptile species inhabit the dry wetland and or the habitatssurrounding the bed of temporary wetlands?

In what abundances do they occur?

If you are collecting baseline information about a temporary wetland that is usually dry (two toten years between flooding), and has deep cracking clays or self mulching clay soils, the followingtechniques apply. The focus on mammal and reptile surveys is due primarily to these soil types andconditions of long dry periods providing habitat critical to the life cycle of resident mammals andreptiles. Wetlands that were previously permanent, that are now being managed to re-instate adry stage, are less of a priority as far as this monitoring technique is concerned. This is becausethese wetlands are not likely to be dry long enough to be colonised by mammals and reptiles fromthe surrounding areas.

Equipment required• 12 X 20 litre buckets per site; • 60 metres of 30cm high fly wire mesh;• One five centimetre long piece of 25mm PVC pipe per bucket and a piece of sponge per bucket; • Metal pins to hold fence in place;• 15 Elliot traps per site;• Two cage traps per site;• Surface spray;• Flagging tape;• Capture bags;• Bait;• Digging tools (eg shovels and mattock hoes);• Scales; and• Mammal and reptile data sheets (included in Owens 2000) 1.

MethodsThe following methods are summarised from NPWS fauna survey protocol 1.

Ideally, fauna surveys happen over a minimum of four nights during the warm spring monthswhen mammals and reptiles are active.

A representative selection of sites from different habitats in and surrounding the temporarywetland is required. If the wetland is inundated at the time of the baseline survey, you should stillsurvey the areas surrounding the wetland basin to see what types of animals could colonise thelake bed on drying.

The number of sites in each habitat type largely depends on the size of the area being surveyed.Sites are primarily chosen as they are representative of the habitat being surveyed. The number ofsites allocated to each habitat type is proportionate to the area covered by each habitat with aminimum of at least one site per habitat. Locate the pitfall lines and trap sites in areas that typifythe habitat type you are surveying.

your wetland - monitoring manual 85

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 92: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Using the standard methods from the agricultural areas biological survey technique, set up oneline of aluminium Elliot and Sherman traps (e.g. Elliot traps) and one pitfall line at each site. Thestandard methods described here are only intended as a guide. However, if the methods appliedvary in any way, they need to be documented and repeated.

Pitfall linesA 50 metre pitfall line consists of six pits at ten metre intervals connected by a fly wire fence. Thepits are 20 litre buckets with lids, which need to be buried so that their rims are flush with theground surface. Drill small holes in the bottom of the buckets to allow water and condensation toseep through to the soil. Remove the buckets once the survey is completed.

Experience has shown that when erecting the drift fence, you must first make a furrow or trenchwith a shovel or mattock along the line, and then stand the fence inside. Replace the displaceddirt on either side so that approximately five centimetres of wire is buried. In windy conditions orwhere a trench may be shallow, it helps to bend the bottom five centimetres of wire to rightangles, to form a stand that is held down by the weight of the dirt. This should hold the fence upon its own, and requires only one pin either side of each pit hole and one at each end to secure it.Ensure that no small skinks are able to get under, or through, the wire at any place. Over the pitsmake sure the bottom of the fence is straight and does not form a ledge over which the skinks canescape.

Put a cage trap at either end of the pit line to catch medium sized mammals and large reptiles.

Fly spray is sprayed in and around the pitfall holes, to discourage ants from killing and eating anycaptured specimens. Also, place a small length of poly pipe in which animals can shelter and apiece of wet sponge to prevent frogs from dessicating.

Trap line (Elliot and Sherman traps)Place fifteen aluminium traps ten metres apart and approximately 20 metres to one side of the pit-line, and parallel to it. Individual trap locations are to be marked with flagging tape, the trapsbeing laid in consecutive numbered sequence to enable easy location. Be careful to keep trap linesall in one vegetation type. To prevent animals from overheating in the morning sun, traps need tobe placed under shrubs and in other shaded areas (eg on the western side of bushes). The trapsmust be checked by no later than ten o’clock every morning.

Care needs to be taken when installing the trap line to ensure that all traps are easily located.Another useful convention is to put two tags at each end of the trap line so that you know youhave reached the end.

A combination of aluminium trap types can be used to capture a range of small mammal speciesdue to the different traps having different trigger settings. For example, Sherman traps catch verysmall species such as planigales which may not trigger an Elliot trap.

Bait - The bait prepared and used for the Elliot and Sherman aluminium traps is a mixture ofrolled oats with peanut butter, fish oil and a little water. The bait is then rolled into small balls andplaced in each trap. In addition to the bait balls, dry dog biscuits that are small and round can beused to encourage the carnivorous species into the traps.

your wetland - monitoring manual86

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 93: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Once animals are caught, record details about their sex, breeding condition and weight on themammal and reptile data sheets. Fill in a site location description data sheet, describing thehabitats you are surveying. Reptiles and amphibians should be recorded on a separate sheet to themammals 1. Ensure that you summarise the trapping effort using the trap effort data sheets andrecord the prevailing weather conditions for the survey period 1.

your wetland - monitoring manual 87

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 94: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Ongoing monitoring

PITFALLS AND TRAPPING B – TECHNIQUE 16Technique 16 is designed to answer the following questions:

What species make up the mammal and reptile population in your wetland and in what abundances do they occur?

How does the population of mammals and reptiles change after management?

The data collected using technique 15 provides a basis for measuring changes to the mammal andreptile population after management. Any repeat surveys need to be undertaken in exactly thesame way if the data is to be comparable.

Equipment requiredSee Technique 15.

MethodsTo ensure the data you collect is comparable to the data collected during the baseline survey, it isessential that you repeat the survey at the same sites and over the same time frame. For example,surveys conducted in the spring months of each year after management provide an indication ofhow the mammal and reptile populations change over time and the data can be entered into themammal and reptile data sheets 1. Remember to record your trapping effort on the data sheetsand the prevailing weather conditions for the survey period 1.

your wetland - monitoring manual88

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 95: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

4.7 BIRDS

BASELINE MONITORING

Fixed area search/historical records - Technique 17

ONGOING MONITORING

Fixed area search - Technique 18

Colonial nesting - Technique 19

your wetland - monitoring manual 89

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 96: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Because birds respond to a range of regional, local and international conditions, it is difficult toidentify how wetland management influences the use of individual wetlands by water birds.However, during times of drought, River Murray wetlands can provide significant refuges forwater birds. During flooding colonial nesting birds are also known to be abundant. Water levelsprovide cues for the breeding cycle to start, and if changes are made too rapidly the cycle can beinterrupted resulting in the abandonment of nests 52, 53. For this reason, colonial nesting birds canbe directly influenced by water regime management.

Birds can be surveyed using a range of techniques. The technique you decide to use dependslargely on the size of your wetland and the level of accuracy you want from your data (seeAppendix 20).

Key references for bird identification are outlined in Table 8.

If monitoring is undertaken on reserves proclaimed under the following Acts of Parliament, then ascientific permit is required from the BRS section of the Department of Environment and Heritage(see Appendix 6).

These Acts are the:• National Parks and Wildlife Act;• Wilderness Protection Act; and• Crown Lands Act.

Table 8: Key references for bird identification

your wetland - monitoring manual90

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Sourcerefer to reference

53

54

55

Comments

Descriptive reference with colourphotographs of waterbirds atdifferent life stages and informationabout the ecology of the species.

Good clear artist impressions of birdswith clear descriptions foridentification.

As above, different lay out.

Title

The Waterbirds of Australia

Field guide to Australian birds

Field guide to the birds ofAustralia

Author

Pringle

Morcombe

Pizzy and Knight

Page 97: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Baseline monitoring

FIXED AREA SEARCH/HISTORICAL RECORDS – TECHNIQUE 17Technique 17 is designed to answer the following questions:

Is there a history of colonial nesting in your wetland? What species of birds inhabit your wetland?

Are there any rare species? In what abundances do all species occur?

This technique will result in an estimate of bird numbers and species in your wetland. It will alsohelp you work out if there is a history of colonial nesting, a major consideration when managingwater levels.

Equipment required• Good quality binoculars or spotting scope;• Bird monitoring data sheet (see Appendix 21); and• Site location data sheet (see Appendix 3).

MethodsColonial nestingIdentify if your wetland has a history of colonial nesting by sourcing historical documents andknowledge. Local bird observers often have records or memories of colonial nesting in wetlands.Identify and speak to local people who may have this knowledge and document the types of birdsand approximate times when colonial nesting was observed. Other sources of information couldinclude:• Birds Australia Atlas database can be interrogated for given coordinates

([email protected]);• South Australian Ornithological Association records (http://www.birdssa.asn.au);• Field naturalists reports;• Government reports;• Consultant reports;• Government opportunistic data base; and• Museum records.

Baseline bird surveyBaseline bird surveys should be conducted during the spring months (September to October) whenbirds are likely to be breeding and towards the end of summer (February to March), to recordbirds using the wetland as a drought or summer refuge. It is ideal to survey your wetland at timeswhen the birds are not roosting. This will give you the greatest chance of identifying the range ofspecies inhabiting your wetland. Surveys should occur in the morning and evening giving you thebest chance of seeing all species inhabiting the wetland (eg rails and crakes are most likely to beseen at these times).

To establish relative estimates of bird numbers and diversity, you will need to identify sites thatgive you maximum coverage of the wetland. These sites can then be revisited on consequentoccasions (ongoing monitoring, see Technique 18). Identify your site locations by driving aroundthe perimeter of the wetland and identify vantage points that will cover large sections of thewetland and where birds will be disturbed the least. In small wetlands (eg those less than 100 ha)

your wetland - monitoring manual 91

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 98: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

it is feasible to survey water birds inhabiting the whole wetland by walking around the shorelineof the wetland. In larger wetlands, find a vantage point (ie fallen log, open water, large uniformareas of vegetation) and/or walk along the edge of section of the wetland. Try to cover a widerange of habitats to ensure the different species of birds are recorded. The number of sites yourequire will depend on the size, habitats and availability of vantage points in your wetland56.

Approach each of the designated survey sites quietly to limit bird disturbance. Using a spottingscope, tripod and binoculars, record the water birds that can be identified. Estimate the relativenumbers of each species (eg 10s, 100s, 1000s). Avoid disturbing birds (particularly during thebreeding seasons) but if they are accidentally flushed, make a note of the direction they fly and trynot to count them at the next location. If birds fly into the area when you are surveying theyshould be included in the count. Where possible, record their breeding status (as per water birdsurvey data sheet in Appendix 21). Record estimates of bird numbers on a dictaphone or on notepaper.

Once the survey is complete, add the estimated abundances of each species and record a totalcount for your survey on the water bird data sheet (see Appendix 21). Ensure that you record thestart and finish time, wind direction, water depth and provide a breeding code when birds areobserved breeding.

your wetland - monitoring manual92

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 99: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Ongoing monitoring

FIXED AREA SEARCH – TECHNIQUE 18Technique 18 is designed to answer the following questions:

What species make up the water bird population in your wetland and in what abundances do they occur?

How do bird numbers and species richness change after management?

The data you collected during the baseline bird survey using Technique 17 provides a basis formeasuring changes in bird populations after management. To keep the data comparable, youneed to replicate the survey, returning to the same sites and undertaking the same amount ofsurvey effort. If you find that the any of the selected sites need to be improved or reduced, yourbaseline survey must be repeated to ensure the post management data you are about to collect iscomparable to the pre management data.

Equipment required See Technique 17.

MethodsBird numbers and diversity change throughout the year in response to changes in habitatavailability within the wetland (as changes in water depth and vegetation growth occur), and asregional, local and international conditions change. If you are interested in understandingpatterns of wetland use by birds through time, the key times for surveying coincide within eachseason and also with times when habitat availability changes.

Where resources are limited, just two surveys conducted at the same time each year can pick up onmajor changes to bird numbers and diversity. This was the case for baseline bird surveys involvingTechnique 17. Ideally, bird surveys are conducted during the spring months of September throughto October when birds are likely to be breeding and during the summer months of February toMarch when birds are using the wetland as a summer/drought refuge. As the timing of the surveycould affect the accuracy of your counts, surveys should occur at times when the birds are notroosting. This maximises your chances of identifying the range of species inhabiting your wetland.The best time of the day to monitor birds is usually in the morning and evening, but this may haveto alter with changes in habitat availability.

To reduce the possibility of observer differences affecting the estimates of birds present in largenumbers, 57 where possible the same observer should repeat the surveys to reduce variation andensure data comparability.

Use the methods described in Technique 17 to determine site selection and data recording.

Once the survey is complete add the estimated abundances of each species and record a totalcount for your survey on the water bird data sheet (see Appendix 21). As was the case in thebaseline survey, make sure you record the survey start and finish time, wind direction and waterdepth and remember to provide a breeding code when birds are observed breeding.

your wetland - monitoring manual 93

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 100: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

COLONIAL NESTING – TECHNIQUE 19Technique 19 is designed to answer the following questions:

Are there colonial nesting birds in the wetland? If so, in what abundances do they occur?

Is flood duration long enough for birds to fledge?

Increases in water levels during spring are known to cue the breeding of colonial nesting birdssuch as ibis and cormorants 58. This response is usually linked to medium to large-scale floodingwhen substantial rises in water level inundate the red gums and lignum at the edge of wetlands.In some wetlands it is possible to manage water levels to increase the duration of wetlandinundation. In these particular cases, it is critical to monitor the patterns of colonial nesting toensure that the chicks of colonial nesting birds fledge.

Equipment requiredSee Technique 17. A boat or canoe may also be required.

MethodOnce colonial nesting birds have been cited during fixed area search bird surveys (see Technique18) a more detailed survey of colonial nesting sites is required.

Once the nests are active and/or when there is a substantial amount of water under the red gumsand lignum (usually at the peak of a flooding period), survey the total number of different speciesof birds nesting in the wetland. These sites can usually be accessed by wading into the wetland orby using a small boat during flooding periods.

The survey should be repeated four to six weeks after the first colonial nesting survey todetermine if there is any re-nesting or nesting of additional species. To determine the success ofthe nesting period, survey after the flooding drops and/or eight to ten weeks after the birds havestarted nesting. Other studies have shown that colonial nesting birds have fledged afterapproximately eight to ten weeks. 79 Fill out the bird monitoring data sheet, remembering to takenote of the water levels in your wetland and if they are rising or falling.

In cases where flood duration can be managed, colonial nesting birds may need to be monitoredmore frequently to make decisions about water level management.

your wetland - monitoring manual94

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 101: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

4.8 FROG MONITORING

BASELINE MONITORING

Recording frog calls A - Technique 20

ONGOING MONITORING

Recording frog calls B - Technique 21

your wetland - monitoring manual 95

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 102: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Most frogs breed seasonally in response to changing environmental conditions, especially tochanges in temperature, air pressure and rainfall. Frogs will therefore be influenced by changes towater levels in wetlands. Drying a wetland too rapidly or too soon after breeding could influencethe survival of tadpoles or eggs.

Baseline monitoring

RECORDING FROG CALLS A – TECHNIQUE 20Technique 20 is designed to answer the following questions:

What frog species inhabit your wetland? In what abundances do they occur?

Frogs have distinctive calls and can be identified accordingly. The Environment ProtectionAuthority holds an annual frog census around South Australia, and the resources developed forthis program can be adapted to answer the questions above. Using the web page(www.epa.sa/gov/au/frogcensus/) and pre-recorded calls, you can develop your skills in identifyingcalls. Descriptions of the calls are available in the book titled A field guide to frogs in Australia 59.The calls you record can then be used to verify your identification.

Equipment required• Tape recorder/tape;• Torch; and• Frog monitoring data sheet (see Appendix 22), site location data sheet (see Appendix 3).

MethodsThe following methods are adapted from the Frog Census (EPA 2001).

Ideally, frog surveys are undertaken during the evening throughout the spring period, in earlysummer, late summer and then at the end of autumn to early winter.

The first survey should occur in the second week of September during Frog Census week. Differentfrog species are known to call at different times during the spring period, so to ensure yourbaseline survey records the range of frog species inhabiting your wetland, undertake monthly frogsurveys during spring. If you hear additional species calling in your wetland, particularly duringwet or humid conditions or when your wetland is being filled, repeat the survey to record these.

There are also a few species of frog that call outside of the spring period, including the LongThumbed Frog, Limnodynastes fletcheri, which commonly calls later in the year (unless there havebeen unusual rainfall events), and Bibron’s Toadlet, Pseudophryne bibroni, which lays eggs on landusually before it rains in February through to May. To make sure these species are recorded in thebaseline surveys, use additional surveys to monitor frogs in early and late summer as well astowards the end of autumn to early winter.

Establish at least two sites in your wetland area, one on the creek or river near the wetland inletand the other in the wetland area itself. The number of sites you require in order to adequatelyassess the frog population of your wetland area largely depends on the size of your wetland. Mostfrog calls can be heard over a distance of approximately 200 metres (Walker pers com. 2002) andthis can be your guide when selecting the number of sites where you need to record calls. Onceyou are in the field, walk around your wetland stopping periodically to listen for frog calls and ifdifferent frogs are heard, set up additional monitoring sites.

your wetland - monitoring manual96

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 103: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Approach the site quietly and turn off all lights in preparation for recording. Record the calls oneto three hours after dusk for a period of approximately 15 minutes. Identify the call of eachspecies and estimate their relative abundances, categorising them according to the frog data sheet(see Appendix 22).

your wetland - monitoring manual 97

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 104: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Ongoing monitoring

RECORDING FROG CALLS B – TECHNIQUE 21Technique 21 in ongoing monitoring is designed to answer the following questions:

What species make up the frog population in your wetland and in what abundances do they occur?

How does the frog population change after management?

The data you collect using Technique 20 can be used as a basis for measuring changes to the frogpopulation after management. Repeat surveys need to be replicate in exactly the same way forthe data to be comparable.

Equipment requiredSee Technique 20.

MethodsTo ensure the data is comparable to the data you collected in the baseline survey, it is important toreplicate the survey using the same sites at the same time of the year, and over the same timeframe. In addition to the spring, summer and late autumn to early winter surveys, frog monitoringcarried out in each season is most beneficial because it gives you greater knowledge about whichspecies are present in your wetland. If no additional species are recorded during the seasonalsurveys then the monitoring frequency can be reduced in the following year.

Enter the frog data into the frog monitoring data sheet in Appendix 22.

your wetland - monitoring manual98

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 105: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

4.9 ADAPTIVE MONITORING AND MANAGEMENT

DATA MANAGEMENT AND STORAGE

EVALUATING/INTERPRETING MONITORING DATA FOR MANAGEMENT

Has monitoring acheived what you set out to achieve?

your wetland - monitoring manual 99

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 106: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Data Management and Storage

Having collected your data it is important to think about where you are going to store thisinformation. Not only will this involve storing physical copies of the datasheets but also inputtingthe data electronically to computer files or databases. Ideally, the data should be storedsomewhere that has long term archiving strategies, is continually maintained and can be updatedin the future.

Long-term storage of data is critical to ensure that information does not become lost throughtime. It also ensures that data is readily accessible into the future, which will help when assessingwhat changes have occurred as a result of managing your wetland. By using a centraliseddatabase, others who may complete the monitoring in the future will also be able to input thedata to the same place.

The systems available to store the data that is collected using monitoring methods outlined in thisdocument were investigated during a ‘Data Management Project’ managed by the River MurrayCatchment Water Management Board. The final report for this project outlines the databasesrecommended for storing the data collected for each parameter, as well as data entry and retrievalrequirements for these systems. The recommendations from this project can be used for collatingthe data you collect at your wetland.

Further information regarding data management or a copy of the Data Management Project FinalReport is available from the Berri Office of the River Murray Catchment Water ManagementBoard.

Evaluating/interpreting monitoring data for management

Interpreting and evaluating the monitoring data collected and then transferring the informationinto management decisions is a complex process and can often involve the use of complicatedstatistics and ecological knowledge. Conversely, some monitoring data may only require simpleanalysis depending on the purpose of the monitoring and the amount of information you needfor making management decisions. Evaluation of this information (ie understanding what theinformation means) also requires a high level of ecological knowledge.

Expert assistance wil be required to help interpret and evaluate the data against the predictedchanges and objectives set at the beginning of the wetland management project (see AdaptiveManagement Model, Figure 1). Staff at the River Murray Catchment Water Management Boardand Department of Water, Land and Biodiversity Conservation will be able to help you identifyand source the expertise required.

Has monitoring achieved what you set out to achieve?

Assessing the data you are collecting as you are carrying out your monitoring program will helpyou determine if you are actually achieving what you set out to achieve (see Table 1, Section 1).This critical step will help you refine your monitoring and optimise the use of available resources.It is difficult to describe the process of evaluating your monitoring data, therefore this complicatedtask should be undertaken with expert assistance.

your wetland - monitoring manual100

CHAPTER 4: Data collection techniques

Page 107: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 101

Appendices

Page 108: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual102

Page 109: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

1 Water Regime Requirements Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104

2 Designing a Monitoring Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105Table A2.1: Data for generating species area curve for Figure 1 (20m2 quadrats) 62 p 5 . . .107Figure A2.1: Species area curve 62 p 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107Table A2.2: Summary of the number of quadrats required to record plant species diversity in lower River Murray Wetlands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108Figure A2.2: Species area curves, Lake Merreti, 1999 (top) and 2001 (bottom). . . . . . . . . . .109Figure A2.3: Example of the number of sites required to adequately sample water temperature in a wetland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110Figure A2.4: Monitoring frequency and timing, reflecting management . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

3 Site Description Data Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

4 Techniques for Surveying Vegetation in Wetlands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

5 Plant Collection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

6 Permits and Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

7 Baseline Vegetation Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

8 Photopoint Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

9 Tree Health Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

10 Fine Scale Vegetation Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153Table A10.1: Codes for classifying plant cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154Table A10.2: Codes for classifying life stage of plants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154

11 Soil Profile Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

12 Processing Soil Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

13 Water Quality Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

14 Water Level Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

15 Techniques for Surveying Fish Populations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

16 Fish Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170Table A16.1: Health codes for fish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

17 Techniques for Surveying Macroinvertebrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

18 Macroinvertebrates Sub Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

19 Techniques for Surveying Vertebrate Fauna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177

20 Techniques for Surveying Water Birds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

21 Water Bird Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

22 Frog Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190

your wetland - monitoring manual 103

Appendices

Page 110: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

APP

END

IX 1

: WA

TER

REG

IME

REQ

UIR

EMEN

TS D

ATA

SH

EET

Hab

itat

ob

ject

ive

Ou

tco

mes

Tim

ing

Du

rati

on

Freq

uen

cy

Rat

e

Dep

th

Mo

nit

ori

ng

fo

r A

dap

tive

M

anag

emen

t

Ris

ks

your wetland - monitoring manual104

Appendix 1

Page 111: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

When setting up your monitoring program you will need to consider a combination of techniquesto ensure you:• can assess if you have obeyed the golden rules (refer page 9);• have the information you need for operational management; and• have data to determine if you have achieved your objectives.

Some key questions you could consider for your monitoring program are: • What is the status of groundwater levels and salinity in your wetland? Does this change with

changing management? Is there a risk of salinising the wetland?• Do you have threatened species or communities resident in your wetland? If so, what is their

relative contribution? Does their status change over time?• What is the health of long-lived vegetation? Does the vegetation health change over time? • What is the composition, cover and life stage of the different vegetative habitats within your

wetland? How do these change over time?

Once you have identified the specific questions you wish to investigate, it becomes easier to focusyour monitoring and decide which sites, type of data, and subsequently which techniques youneed to use as a means of addressing these questions. These questions provide a framework forfocusing your data presentation and evaluation at the later stages of your monitoring program.

Pilot study, how much do I monitor?In ecological research and monitoring, it is impossible to account for every single individual in apopulation60. Imagine trying to catch every fish in a wetland or count all of the plants growingaround the edge! It simply would not happen.

Monitoring aims to capture a representative sub-group of the total population. HOWEVER, asingle sample from a wetland will tell you very little about its ecology. Therefore, how manysamples need to be taken and how many sites are required?

To answer this question, it is essential for you to work out the level of variation within thewetland and also decide on the amount of detail required to answer the monitoring questions (iethe level of data reliability) 61. Since the answer to this question is going to differ for eachwetland, you will need to work it out for yourself by establishing ‘trial monitoring’ or a pilotstudy.

Among other things, pilot studies can help you to work out the:• number of samples to be taken at each site;• number of sites; and• location of these sites within the wetland.

Some standard techniques for pilot studies are presented below. The initial stages of developing amonitoring program are very time consuming but the benefits far outweigh the initial costs. Pilotstudies also help you work out how to obtain the greatest amount of information for the leastamount of effort.

your wetland - monitoring manual 105

Appendix 2 DESIGNING A MONITORING PROGRAM

Page 112: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Try before you buyFew of us would buy a pair of shoes without trying them on. It simply would be a waste of moneyto purchase shoes that would cripple you when you started to walk. If you plan to spend time andresources on a monitoring program, it is worth taking the time at the beginning of your projectto work out the best approach and find your feet! All wetlands are unique, making it difficult tobe prescriptive about what methods or how many sites are required to make your monitoringprogram worthwhile. ‘Trial Monitoring’ or Pilot Studies are incredibly valuable in determiningproject design.

Pilot studies can be used to: • test the equipment and sampling gear prior to the project commencing;• help you decide the most appropriate methods;• decide the number of sites that are required to accurately represent the wetland;• determine the replication required within a site; and• determine what can be achieved with the available resources.

If in doubt, try it out!

Number of samples at each siteTo ensure you can accurately describe the changes taking place within your wetland, it isimportant to keep the amount of variation recorded by your monitoring program to a minimum.The best place to start is at your first site. When designing your program, always aim to minimisethe variation you record within your site. Once you are confident about doing this, it will becomeeasier to link the changes you record to changes that are happening over the entire wetland,rather than to changes taking place at the site level.

Replication or repeated sampling within a site is important when you wish to compare the resultsfrom different locations within your wetland. For example, you may want to investigate theimpacts of carp on vegetation, and have stocked one half of your wetland with carp and the otherwithout. Therefore, you will need to compare the samples taken from within the same site todetermine the background variation in both the ‘carp stocked’ and ‘carp free’ sites. To make thiscomparison with confidence, it is essential to take several samples (to record more accurately thenatural differences in vegetation) within each monitoring site. Once you know the amount ofvariation within a site, you can then identify the actual differences between the sites, thusseparating the differences due to background variation.

There are a number of procedures available to work out how many repeat samples (replicates) areneeded to obtain a reliable estimate of the parameter you are sampling. Two methods suitablefor species data (eg vegetation) and physical data (eg water quality) are presented below.

Species dataThe species area curve is most commonly applied to vegetation surveys to work out how manyquadrats are required to obtain a reliable estimate of the population 62. This technique can alsobe used to work out how much area a quadrat needs to cover in order to assess the vegetationcommunity adequately. The same principle can also be applied to work out how many replicatenets are required at each site to investigate other parameters such as macroinvertebrates or fish.

your wetland - monitoring manual106

Appendix 2

Page 113: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 107

Appendix 2

Basically, the species area curve involves taking a number of samples at a site and plotting thecumulative number of species against the cumulative number of samples (Table A2.1 and FigureA2.1) 62. This means you keep increasing the size of the sample (eg the number of quadrats ornets or the size of a quadrat) while adding the number of new species recorded to the numberrecorded in the previous sample (Figure A2.1). Keep repeating this procedure until the number ofspecies you have sampled levels off. For example, in the table below, once you had 14 species(seven quadrats) you would have adequately sampled the population.

Table A2.1: Data for generating species area curve for Figure 1 (20m2 quadrats) 62 p 5.

Number of species

3

4

5

3

4

4

4

3

5

4

Cumulative numberof species

3

5

6

8

11

12

14

14

15

15

Cumulative areasampled (m2)

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

Number of newspecies

3

2

1

2

3

1

2

0

1

0

Sample number

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Figure A2.1: Species area curve 62 p 5.

Page 114: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

The number of quadrats or nets required to adequately sample the population will depend on thespecies diversity at your wetland. In wetlands where diversity is high, a greater amount of effort isrequired to adequately sample the population 63.

Table A2.2 collates all vegetation data from surveys in five wetlands over an 18 month period,showing how the minimum number of 1 X 1m2 quadrats required (85% of the species recorded)varied between wetlands (see Table A2.2). It also shows that it can take a lot of extra effort (ieadditional quadrats) to pick up the last few rare species.

Table A2.2: Summary of the number of quadrats required to record plant species diversity inlower River Murray Wetlands.

The number of quadrats required for vegetation surveys may also vary within your wetland over aperiod of time. For example, when deciding how many quadrats you need for your vegetationsurvey, you need to be mindful that the vegetation will change with changing management. As awetland fills, the species diversity is likely to decrease as the wetland makes the transition fromthe dry wetland vegetation stage to the aquatic vegetation stage. This was demonstrated at LakeMerreti where the species area curves from two surveys (1999 and 2001) differed (see Figure A2.2).The 1999 survey recorded low water levels in the wetland, exposing areas where dry wetlandplants could grow. These plants contributed to the rapid increase in the cumulative number ofspecies recorded. During the 2001 survey, water levels were higher and the wetland wasdominated by aquatic species. As there were fewer species, a greater number of quadrats wererequired to reach a plateau on the species area curve (see Figure A2.2). It is therefore advisable touse a greater number of replicates (rather than the bare minimum required) where an increase inspecies diversity is likely to occur. It is not advisable to change the number of quadrats you surveyon different survey dates.

your wetland - monitoring manual108

Appendix 2

Number of quadrats tocapture 100% of species

929156

10

Wetland name

Ngak IndauLittle DuckLake Merreti LovedayPilby Wetland

Number of quadrats tocapture 85% of species

421749

Page 115: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 109

Figure A2.2: Species area curves, Lake Merreti, 1999 (top) and 2001 (bottom).

Physical dataAs with species data, repeated sampling of water quality within a site (replication) is aimed atrecording a reliable estimate of the value for that site. The number of samples required willdepend largely on what level of accuracy is required to answer your monitoring question. It willalso depend on the parameter being measured. For example, parameters such as turbidity fluctuatewidely within a site and in this case, several samples should be taken (e.g. four) and then averagedto get a more accurate reading. Other parameters (e.g. salinity) are relatively stable within a givensite, and a single accurate measurement per site may be adequate.

Number of sites at each wetlandThe number of sites required to accurately describe changes in your wetland depends on theamount of variation you record between sites. If you have a wetland with a large amount ofvariation, then you will need a large number of sites to account for these differences.

Species data There are a range of techniques that can be used to determine the number of monitoring sitesneeded to survey and account for the variation within your wetland. One of the simplesttechniques involves using the species area curve principle. In this case, the cumulative number ofsites is plotted against the cumulative number of species recorded in each site.

Once you have worked out the number of replicates per site, continue repeating the survey at anumber of locations, recording the cumulative number of species per site. Again, once thecumulative number of species levels off you can then work out how many sites it will take toaccount for variation at the wetland level. As a general rule, the more uniform your wetland, theless sites you need to adequately sample the population. Because larger wetlands are usually lessuniform, they are going to require more sites compared to smaller wetlands.

Appendix 2

Page 116: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

The number of sites that you need to sample to adequately account for the variation within yourwetland differs between wetlands. While the actual number of sites cannot be pre-determined, itis advisable to sample at least three to five sites to ensure the data you collect is robust enoughfor any future analysis.

Physical dataThe number of sites required to adequately represent the water quality of your wetland willdepend on how uniform the wetland is. One technique for determining the number of requiredsites looks at the amount of variation around the average (referred to as standard deviation). As ageneral rule, it is best to collect enough samples to make the standard deviation less than or equalto 10% of the average value for the wetland. In the example presented in Figure A2.3, if theaverage value is 25º C then you would be aiming for a standard deviation of approximately 2.5º C.In this case you would need to collect at least 11 samples for the standard deviation to fall within10% (2.5º C) of the average value.

Figure A2.3: Example of the number of sites required to adequately sample water temperaturein a wetland.

Start by collecting a minimum of three samples from different locations in your wetland. Work outthe average and the standard deviation for the values collected. Both can be calculated using ascientific calculator or the in-built functions in Microsoft Excel (‘=AVERAGE’ and ‘=STDEV’). If thecalculations from the three initial samples show that the standard deviation falls within 10% ofthe average then three sites would be adequate to represent the average water quality of thewetland. Otherwise, you should continue this process, adding new sites and repeating thecalculations until the standard deviation does fall within 10% of the average. This will representthe number of sites required.

your wetland - monitoring manual110

Appendix 2

Page 117: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 111

Location of sites within a wetlandWhen choosing the location of monitoring sites within your wetland you should aim to avoidsampling bias. To achieve this, random sampling should be applied to site selection. 60 Sincewetlands are generally not uniform, it is best to choose the method of stratified random sampling 60.This involves dividing the area (wetland) into sections and randomly choosing a set number of sitesfrom each section. If there are different habitats in your wetland (eg areas of constricted and openwaters) then these can be used as sampling sections. If the sampling sections are different sizes thenumber of sampling sites needs to be proportional to the area of each of the identified areas 60.

While there are many ways of randomly selecting sites, one method involves placing a numberedgrid over a map, randomly generating numbers (via computer or by pulling them from a hat) andselecting sites based on the location of the number on the map. It is also advisable to createadditional random numbers to replace sites that end up in very close proximity to each other.

When you sample within each site, you must ensure that sampling is random, that is, it is notfavouring particular microhabitats (eg different vegetation types or logs/open water) because thiswill bias the results. It is equally important to return to the same microhabitat in consequentsurveys.

Monitoring frequency and timing The frequency and timing of monitoring is recommended in the monitoring techniques section.However, if your focus differs, you need to consider the following when deciding the frequency andtiming of monitoring. For example:• project focus (questions you are asking);• rate and timing of management;• response time of the parameter; and • resources available.

Monitoring frequency will be driven in part by the response time of the parameter you aremonitoring. For example, your question might relate to how phytoplankton populations respond tochanging water regimes. As phytoplankton are able to respond quickly, it is essential to monitor thephytoplankton community at a daily frequency until there is little variation between monitoringdates. Learning from the experiences of other researchers is invaluable. There are many groups offlora and fauna for which the response times are known.

The rate of wetland management also guides the monitoring frequency. The rate of managementrefers to the length of time the wetland takes to fill and dry. For example, if it takes two months tofill a wetland, then it would be a waste of resources trying to monitor it daily, as the findings wouldbecome superfluous because no wetland can be managed at such a fine frequency.

As a wetland changes from one phase to another (wet-dry, dry-wet) changes within the ecosystemoccur more rapidly, therefore the monitoring frequency and timing need to reflect these changes aswell. (see Figure A2. 4). The proposed monitoring timetable needs to be flexible to accommodatechanges to management and the associated changes in the sample program. Furthermore,monitoring should be undertaken at the same time after the management event (eg one week afterfilling) to ensure the wetland response can be compared over a range of management events.

Appendix 2

Page 118: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual112

Figure A2.4: Monitoring frequency and timing, reflecting management.

Appendix 2

Waterlevel inwetland

Time

= Survey time

Page 119: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Techniques 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21

Data entry – Site description data sheet

Date: Use DD/MM/YY format

Observers: Record three initials for each observer.

Site name: Use a standard method of allocating the site numbers. In the first three spaces, fill in thefirst three letters of the wetland name. In the last four spaces fill in a numerical site code, with thefirst two numbers indicating the site number, and the third and fourth indicating replicates orquadrats at the site. For example, site one of Lake Merreti would be MER 01 00.

Camp name: This field should be completed when setting up sites for bird, fish, and mammal andreptile surveys so the data may be entered into the Biological Survey Database held by DEH. Campname is a three-letter code based on the local property name (generally used for wetlands), anearby prominent feature or the mapsheet name. For example, the camp name for Black StumpWetland would be recorded as BLA = Black Stump Wetland. Cross out this box if it is not a bird, fishor mammal and reptile site.

Property/owner: Record the name of the property you are working on (eg River Murray NationalPark) and the owner of the property (eg DEH).

Wetland name: Fill in the full name of the wetland you are working in.

Map sheet name/number: Record the map sheet number and name, off the map from which you areworking, to ensure that sites can be easily located.

Altitude: Take an altitude reading (to the nearest 10 metres) from contour lines on the appropriatetopographic map. A GPS is not of suitable accuracy to use to determine altitude (Heard andChannon 1997).

AMG zone: This is shown in the lower left of a 1: 50 000 map sheet and will also be in the set updetails in your GPS (make sure you have the correct AMG zone in your GPS before you take thereading). The AMG zone for the SA River Murray and Lower Lakes would be 54.

Easting/northing: The easting and northing can either be collected using a GPS or recorded from themap.

If you are recording your eastings and northings from your map, remember that the easting is readfrom the horizontal axis of the map and the northing from the vertical axis. An example from Heardand Channon2 is outlined below:

+————— ————- ————— ————— —————

433000mE 34 435 36

The cross corresponds with easting 436200, and the northing is read similarly from the vertical axisof the map.

your wetland - monitoring manual 113

Appendix 3 SITE DESCRIPTION DATA SHEET

Page 120: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Method: Record the method of easting/northing collection by ticking either the GPS or Map box.

GPS Datum setting: If you use a GPS it is important to record the GPS Datum setting. You will findthis information in the set up details in the menu on your GPS (eg you should set your GPS receiverto WGS-84 and the coordinate system to UTM, this is suitably close to GDA94 64). Record thedatum setting by circling the appropriate datum on the data sheet.

GPS accuracy: If you did use a GPS to record the northing and easting, record the accuracy of theGPS reading (eg ±1-20m).

Survey details: List the different parameters recorded at this site (eg vegetation, water quality) andrecord the number of replicates for each type of survey in the box next to the parameter (egvegetation/7, to show you had a vegetation survey at this site with seven quadrats).

Mud map: Neatly draw the location of your site relative to key features in the landscape such asfence lines, roads, large trees or creeks. Remember to draw the North arrow onto your map anddescribe the location of your site below.

your wetland - monitoring manual114

Appendix 3

Page 121: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 115

Date Observers DD MM YY

Site Name Camp Name

Property Owner

Wetland Name

Map Sheet Number Name of Map Sheet

Altitude AMG Zone

Easting Northing

Method: Map GPS GPS Datum Setting (circle) GPS Accuracy

GDA94 WGS84 AGD66

Survey Details: Parameter Replicates

Mud map

Location Comments (describe location of site in relation to key features, eg roads). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 3 SITE DESCRIPTION Page ___ of ___

Techniques 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21

Page 122: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual116

Date Observers DD MM YY

Site Name Camp Name

Property Owner

Wetland Name

Map Sheet Number Name of Map Sheet

Altitude AMG Zone

Easting Northing

Method: Map GPS GPS Datum Setting (circle) GPS Accuracy

GDA94 WGS84 AGD66

Survey Details: Parameter Replicates

Mud map

Location Comments (describe location of site in relation to key features, eg roads). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 3 SITE DESCRIPTION Page ___ of ___

Techniques 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21

B L A O 1 O O Black Stump Camp

Black Stump Wetland

Black Stump Station

R J T P T DO 9 O 1 O 3

1 1

5 4

± 5-2Om

1Om3 7 8 O 1 4 6 2 2 8 8 6 6

Macros 1Water quality 1Vegetation 3

Site located on western side of wetland adjacent to secondary flow path. Followtrack from inlet structure 3.5 km and turn down second track on the left nearlimestone cliffs.

6929–4 Pooginook

J. Smith

BLA O1

NSecondary

flow path

Inletstructure

limestonecliffs vines

EXAMPLE

Page 123: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 117

APP

END

IX 4

: TEC

HN

IQU

ES F

OR

SU

RV

EYIN

G V

EGET

ATI

ON

IN W

ETLA

ND

S

Appendix 4

Ad

van

tag

es

Rep

eate

d s

urv

eys

will

tra

ck t

he

exte

nt

of

chan

ge

in v

eget

atio

nzo

nes

acr

oss

th

e w

etla

nd

Rap

id v

isu

al a

sses

smen

t o

f la

rge

scal

e ve

get

atio

n c

han

ges

Hig

hly

qu

anti

fied

dat

a, r

apid

asse

ssm

ent

tech

niq

ue

in o

pen

wat

er h

abit

ats

Rap

id a

sses

smen

t o

f co

ver

on

set

elev

atio

ns,

sh

ou

ld p

ick

up

rare

sp

ecie

s. A

ble

to

co

mp

are

spec

ies

com

po

siti

on

am

on

gsi

tes

and

ele

vati

on

s.

Rap

id a

sses

smen

t o

f co

ver

wit

hin

zo

nes

of

a w

etla

nd

,sh

ou

ld p

ick

up

rar

e sp

ecie

s.

Oth

er s

tud

ies

usi

ng

tec

hn

iqu

e

65 65 3

9 21

22

19 65

Wh

at is

yo

ur

focu

s /

qu

esti

on

?

Ass

ess

the

zon

atio

n o

fw

etla

nd

pla

nts

Ass

ess

larg

e sc

ale

chan

ges

to

wet

lan

d p

lan

ts

Ass

ess

the

‘co

ver’

of

ind

ivid

ual

sp

ecie

s an

dd

eter

min

es v

eget

atio

nzo

nat

ion

Ass

ess

cove

r o

f in

div

idu

alsp

ecie

s

Ass

esse

s th

e ‘c

ove

r’ o

fin

div

idu

al s

pec

ies.

Dis

adva

nta

ges

Do

es n

ot

pro

vid

e in

form

atio

nab

ou

t p

rop

ort

ion

of

each

sp

ecie

sw

ith

in z

on

es, l

ikel

y to

mis

s ra

resp

ecie

s, h

igh

deg

ree

of

sub

ject

ivit

y w

hen

det

erm

inin

gzo

nes

Deg

ree

of

chan

ge

is n

ot

qu

anti

fied

, sm

alle

r / r

are

spec

ies

no

t lik

ely

to b

e o

bse

rved

inp

ho

tog

rap

hs

Larg

e n

um

ber

of

site

s re

qu

ired

to

rep

rese

nt

wet

lan

d, m

iss

rare

tax

a,sl

ow

tec

hn

iqu

e at

ed

ge

of

wet

lan

d w

her

e sm

all h

erb

aceo

us

pla

nts

are

ab

un

dan

t

Sub

ject

ive

asse

ssm

ent

of

cove

rw

ith

in q

uad

rat

usi

ng

co

ver

sco

rin

g s

yste

m, i

nte

nsi

ve s

et u

pp

has

e (d

eter

min

ing

sit

eel

evat

ion

s)

Sub

ject

ive

asse

ssm

ent

of

cove

rw

ith

in q

uad

rat

usi

ng

rea

l vis

ual

esti

mat

es, s

ub

ject

ivit

y w

hen

det

erm

inin

g z

on

es.

Surv

ey m

eth

od

(ve

get

atio

n)

Lin

e in

terc

ept

(Veg

etat

ion

zo

nes

,m

easu

rin

g t

he

dis

tan

ce o

f ea

chve

get

atio

n z

on

e al

on

g a

tap

em

easu

re)

Pho

to p

oin

t m

on

ito

rin

g

Lin

e in

terc

ept

(in

div

idu

al p

lan

ts,

mea

suri

ng

‘hit

s’ o

f in

div

idu

alp

lan

ts a

lon

g a

tap

e m

easu

re)

Qu

adra

t b

ased

su

rvey

on

set

elev

atio

ns

Qu

adra

t b

ased

su

rvey

,ve

get

atio

n c

ove

r al

on

g z

on

es.

Page 124: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual118

Techniques 1, 5

Data entry – Plant voucher specimens data sheet

1. Species (Final IDs): Leave this column blank. This information will be filled in by staff at theherbarium.

2. Species (Field use): Record common name or a description that can be used while in the field, tohelp you to recognise plants.

3. Voucher numbers: Record a unique number for each plant specimen collected, usually five digits. First three letters are the same as the site number. The last two are consecutive numbering ofcollected specimens.

4. Site number: Record the site number where you collected the plant.

Instructions for collection

The following section is adapted from Heard and Channon 1997 (see section 2 chapter 5.2.2). 2

A specimen of each plant species recorded in the vegetation survey should be provided with avoucher number so that the species can be verified by the SA Herbarium (remember that a permit isrequired before collection of plant specimens, see Appendix 6). Collecting specimens will improvethe representation of the flora in the Herbarium and provide permanent taxonomic andbiogeographical records. After you have had the species verified, only collect duplicates of theplants if they are a better example of species you have already had identified.

Collect enough material to cover an A3 sized sheet. An ideal sample should contain flowers orbuds, leaves, fruit and bark (for trees), and should be represented by as few pieces as possible. Use paper envelopes for small specimens and attach these to a label so they are not lost in transit.

Smaller annuals and ephemerals should be represented by a whole plant, including basal area androots. This is particularly important for reeds, rushes, sedges and grasses. Care should be taken toleave bulbs (eg orchids and lilies) in the ground, where possible, to ensure their populations remainviable. For smaller annuals and ephemerals collect a number of individuals, again collectingspecimens with roots.

When in the field, collect a sample of the plants you survey, put them into plastic snap lock bagsand label them with a permanent texta. Scrunch up some paper and place it in the bag so that thecondensation created by the plant can be absorbed (this will avoid the chance of plants wilting).

Plants are best pressed before leaving each site, and only the minimum required for identificationshould be pressed (although it is advisable to collect enough of the specimen to send to the SAHerbarium and create a field herbarium for future reference). Tag each specimen as it is collectedwith a voucher label, placed away from parts that need to be examined in the identification process(eg flowers, buds). Wrap an adhesive label around the specimen, stick it to itself to ensure that thevoucher number cannot be separated from the plant and write the voucher number on the sticker.Also write the voucher number on the newspaper where you have pressed the plant and fill in thevoucher data sheet, placing it in the press. Paper in the press should be changed if the specimensare damp when collected or are succulent (this will prevent specimens from becoming mouldy). Use one folded full newspaper sheet per specimen. Cardboard dividers should be used frequently,particularly between bulky specimens.

Appendix 5 PLANT COLLECTION PROCEDURE

Page 125: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 119

Date Observers DD MM YY

Species (Final IDs) Species (Field use) Voucher nos. Site no.

Appendix 5 PLANT VOUCHER SPECIMENS Page ___ of ___

Techniques 1, 5

Page 126: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual120

Date Observers DD MM YY

Species (Final IDs) Species (Field use) Voucher nos. Site no.

Appendix 5 PLANT VOUCHER SPECIMENS Page ___ of ___

Techniques 1, 5

Creeping monkey flower BLA O1 BLA O1 O1Curly pond weed BLA O2 ✓

Lignum BLA O3 ✓

Ruby saltbush BLA O4 ✓

Aster (with dead flower stalks) BLA O5 ✓

Red water milfoil BLA O6 ✓

Slender knotweed BLA O7 ✓

Sneezeweed BLA O8 ✓

Spiny sedge BLA O9 ✓

3 - corner bulrush BLA 1O ✓

R J T P T DO 9 O 1 O 3

EXAMPLE

1 1

Page 127: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 121

Prior to starting a monitoring program, it is important that you make sure you have all of therelevant permits and permissions to undertake your survey. Remember to factor this into yourschedule because without it you cannot take your monitoring program any further than yourhome or office.

Under the National Parks and Wildlife Act any person, other than a Department for Environmentand Heritage employee, is required to have a permit for collecting flora and fauna speciesanywhere in the state (Heard and Channon 1997). Other land managers may also require separatepermission (eg private land holders, Local Government, ForestrySA). The following sections havebeen taken from Canty 2000 2,1.

Scientific permitsA permit issued under the scientific permit system, managed by the Biological Survey and Research(BSR) Section (DEH), meets the requirements for a number of South Australian Acts in relation toconducting scientific research. The purpose of the permit is to ensure that the taking of protectedflora and fauna for research purposes does not impact on the broader population orenvironmental integrity of a habitat. Other authorities may also require additional approval andthese are detailed below.

Scientific permits are required if the project falls under one or more of the following categories:

• Scientific research that involves ‘taking’ a protected species from the wild (this includesgovernment and private land). The term ‘take’, with reference to an animal, is defined underthe National Parks and Wildlife Act as any act of hunting, catching, restraining, killing orinjuring, and any act of attempting or assisting to hunt, catch, restrain, kill or injure. Under theAct all native mammals, birds and reptiles (excluding some species listed in Schedule 10 of thatAct) and threatened species of amphibian are protected throughout the State.

• Scientific research carried out in any of the various categories of reserves and elsewhere in theState is proclaimed under the following Acts of Parliament: the National Parks and Wildlife Act,the Wilderness Protection Act and the Crown Lands Act. Scientific research inside these reservesincludes observational studies. Remember to include the collection of water, soil, rock, leaflitter, invertebrates and non-threatened species of amphibian (which do not require a permitoutside of a DEH-managed reserves). Native plants are also protected in the following reservesand will also require a permit.

The applicable reserve areas are as follows:

National Parks and Wildlife Act: National ParkConservation ParkGame ReserveRecreation ParkRegional Reserve

Wilderness Protection Act: Wilderness Protection AreaWilderness Protection Zone

Native Vegetation Management Act: Heritage Agreement Area

Crown Lands Act: Conservation Reserve

Appendix 6 PERMITS and PERMISSIONS

Page 128: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Under the NPW Act, Government-controlled land is defined as:

• any reserve;• any other Crown land;• any land reserved for or dedicated to public purposes; • any forest reserve; and• roadside vegetation, council reserves and land controlled by the Australian Government.

Heritage Agreement areas are usually private land, and approval from the Native VegetationCouncil is required to conduct research in those areas. Delegation has been provided to the BSRSection (DEH) by the Native Vegetation Council to issue scientific permits on its behalf. Theapproval of the landholder is still required for access to private land.

Exemptions from scientific permitsProtected species are those defined in the NPW Act. This currently includes all birds, mammals andreptiles and two species of threatened frog, Geocrinia laevis (Smooth Frog) and Litoria raniformis(Golden Bell Frog). Not included (outside of the above reserves) are all other species of frog,invertebrates and fish. Fish species considered under threat may need a permit from theDepartment of Primary Industries and Resources SA (Fisheries).

All DEH staff do not require permits if specimens are being collected as part of official duties. Thisincludes contract staff carrying out DEH-funded projects. If a DEH staff member wishes to pursuea scientific project in their own time (eg graduate/postgraduate studies, setting up a trap-linewhile on holiday) then they will need a permit.

ForestrySA LandsAnyone wishing to conduct research or collect specimens from ForestrySA lands must contact theManager, Policy and Community Forestry on 8303 9900. There may be access restrictions duringfire season.

Aboriginal HeritageUnder the Aboriginal Heritage Act , anyone wishing to undertake work (excavate, collect samples,etc) at Aboriginal sites must obtain a permit from the Aboriginal Heritage Section, Department ofState Aboriginal Affairs. Contact details are 8226 8900 or www.dossa.sa.gov.au. For moreinformation about identifying Aboriginal sites, see the cultural considerations section below.

Aboriginal LandsProjects planning to work in Aboriginal Lands (eg Maralinga Tjarutja, Anangu Pitjantjatjara Lands)must seek access approval from the appropriate management authority. A scientific permit wouldonly be valid subject to this approval being obtained.

FisheriesConducting surveys involving the sampling of native fish for scientific purposes requires a permitfrom Primary Industries and Resources SA (Fisheries).

Additional requirements when animals are involvedThere are additional requirements for conducting research or education involving animals. Theseinclude obtaining:

your wetland - monitoring manual122

Appendix 6

Page 129: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 123

• a licence for teaching, research or experimentation involving animals from the Office of AnimalWelfare, Department for Environment and Heritage;

• approval from an official Animal Ethics Committee (AEC) for any project involving interactionwith vertebrates (excluding fish). Animal ethics approval can be given by any registered AEC;

• a licence from State Fauna Authority and the AEC to possess and administer drugs foreuthanasia as part of any project involving the collection of voucher specimens during surveywork; and

• a fisheries permit to use specific survey equipment and collect specimens. Permits are availablefrom the Department of Primary Industries and Resources SA (Fisheries).

Cultural considerationsAreas proclaimed as Aboriginal Lands or owned by Aboriginal people will require advance entryapproval and may require each survey participant to seek and obtain an individual entry permit. Itis important to keep in mind however, that land outside of these areas may also include sites ofAboriginal significance or other cultural issues. This is particularly the case in the arid/semi-aridareas of the State where Aboriginal traditions have been less modified. Many areas of the Statenow have formal Aboriginal Consultative Committees, which can advise on the likely impact ofsurveys on significant sites.

Examples of how survey techniques can impact on Aboriginal culture include:• entry of uninitiated people or people of the wrong sex into sacred sites;• disturbance of significant landscape features such as rock outcrops or trees;• disturbance of soil in burial grounds; and• killing and removal of plants and animals sacred to the local Aboriginal group.

It is an offence under the Aboriginal Heritage Act to interfere with and remove material from anAboriginal site anywhere throughout South Australia. If an Aboriginal site, object or remains arediscovered during a survey, the site or objects must not be disturbed, the location should be notedand the information forwarded to the Minister for State Aboriginal Affairs.

Aboriginal people may wish to become involved in the survey. Aboriginal people can haveintimate ecological knowledge that can benefit a survey and greatly extend the informationobtained (this knowledge should not be exploited and used without permission, and remains theproperty of the Aboriginal custodian). Their level of involvement may be to ensure their culturalsites are not violated, or they may wish to take a more active role. As with any consultancy,payment for Aboriginal knowledge and experience to assist in a survey is not unreasonable andshould be included in any survey budget involving Aboriginal lands. A copy of the final reportshould be provided to any Aboriginal group involved in the survey.

As an initial approach, the Department of State Aboriginal Affairs can advise on Aboriginalconsultative processes and contacts.

The Aboriginal Heritage Act 1988 protects Aboriginal sites, objects and remains, and it is anoffence to damage, disturb or interfere with them. A site register is kept by the Department ofState Aboriginal Affairs (DOSAA), but is not comprehensive, and sites or objects do not need to beregistered to attract the blanket protection of the Act.Aboriginal Heritage Site Avoidance Visits are a practical risk management tool to assist in avoidinginterference with Aboriginal sites, objects or remains, but might not always be necessarydepending on the specifics of your proposal.

Appendix 6

Page 130: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual124

Contact DOSAA on (08) 8226 8936 or www.dosaa.sa.gov.au to establish whether your proposal islikely to interfere with Aboriginal sites, objects and remains under the Act. The department canalso advise you on the appropriate contact person for your area, and other advice in caseAboriginal Heritage Site Avoidance Visits are necessary.

Quarantine considerationsBecause surveys tend to target the most pristine areas of habitat, there is a need to be consciousof the impact of the survey on those areas. However, to thoroughly search a representativequadrat will usually mean a high impact on that particular area. This may involve disturbance topotential animal refuge areas such as the destruction of hollow logs, removal of bark, raking ofleaf litter, dismantling rock outcrops, etc. Keep in mind that the area sampled by the surveyquadrat is usually insignificant when taken in context of the total habitat area. While steps can betaken to minimise these impacts (eg by replacing disturbed material after searching), there is amuch less visible and possibly more insidious threat posed by surveys.

Recent declines in frog populations around the world in both disturbed and relatively pristineareas have raised concern about the impact scientists may be having while carrying out researchon frog populations. Although most amphibian declines can be attributed to factors such ashabitat modification or obvious chemical pollution, this does not explain the dramatic declinesoccurring in pristine areas. There is concern that amphibian diseases and parasites may be pickedup from one amphibian population and transferred to many others on scientists’ equipment suchas collecting nets, holding containers and boots.

While frogs seem to be particularly sensitive to environmental change, there are other knowndiseases such as cryptosporidiosis that affect reptiles, which can be readily transferred betweenpopulations if proper attention to hygiene is not taken.

As a precautionary principle, steps must be taken to ensure effective hygiene in order to minimisethe risk of transferring known (and possibly as yet unknown) diseases between populations. Thiswill generally only apply when moving from one survey area to another widely separated area, orbetween surveys. Researchers also need to be alert to the possibility of captured animals, showingany signs of disease, infecting other animals. The sterilisation or disposal of any collection andholding equipment, which has been in contact with diseased animals, will help prevent furtherinfection.

Additional information and recommendations for quarantine are available from the BiologicalSurvey and Research section in the Department for Environment and Heritage (DEH).

Another major issue with survey techniques is the risk of transferring plant and soil-borne diseases.Material adhering to tools, traps and other equipment used for establishing trap lines poses thegreatest risk. Soil-borne fungal diseases such as phytophthora are serious threats to nativevegetation in more temperate areas and can be easily transferred from one area to another byinfected soil clinging to equipment, vehicles and clothing. For the latest information andrecommendations on minimising the risk of spreading soil-borne diseases, contact DEH or the localNPWS Ranger.Prior to a survey, particularly in agricultural areas, you should contact the relevant District Councilsand the Animal and Plant Control Commission to determine what significant pest and diseasespecies may be present in the area (eg broomrape) and how to avoid breaching any localquarantines or acting as an unwitting vector. Similarly, if a significant pest species is discoveredduring a survey, local authorities should be informed.

Appendix 6

Page 131: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 125

Simple procedures such as brushing off soil and seeds from field equipment, clothing and vehiclesshould become part of standard practice while in the field. More thorough procedures such aswashing equipment and sterilisation by soaking or spraying with methylated alcohol may berecommended in high-risk areas. Although some areas of the State are flagged as high risk areas,researchers should use their initiative when assessing the risk of contamination between sites andpopulations and take the necessary precautions to minimise risk at all times.

Piezometer installation In addition to the Aboriginal heritage issues that need to be considered when establishingpiezometers (see above), it is likely that a permit is also required from the Department of Water,Land and Biodiversity Conservation. For additional information on acquiring a permit, pleasecontact the Drilling Inspector, DWLBC, on (08) 8463 6872.

Appendix 6

Page 132: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual126

Technique 1

Data recording – Baseline vegetation inventory

To fill out the data sheets included in this section follow the instructions outlined in Guide toNative Vegetation Survey 2 (see section 2, ‘field information’).

The following description includes protocol for adding data specifically relevant to wetlands to thedata sheet.

Physical data sheetIn the section where the property / owner is identified, add a hyphen and then the name of thewetland eg River Murray National Park/DEH – Ngak Indau Wetland. In cases where there is noproperty / owner identified and the wetland name could be mistaken for the name of theproperty, insert the word ‘wetland’ after the wetland name in brackets eg Werta Wert (wetland).

Vegetation data sheetRecord the description for the vegetation association being surveyed (eg red gum community) inthe comments section at the bottom of the data sheet. Before the comment write the code * veg.

In the comments section add information about the climatic conditions leading up to the survey.Before the comment write the code * clc.

To add comments about the flow conditions leading up the survey, write the code * flc before thecomment.

Appendix 7 BASELINE VEGETATION INVENTORY

(including physical description data sheets, vegetation data sheets, oppurtunistic survey sheets)

Page 133: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

127

0 0

Film Frame

YYMMDD quadsiteMap(3 initials)

(of location)321

1 32 4

N

Data Entrant(3 initials)(Office use only)

DateObservers

(3 initials)Photographer

Field Order

Site No.

Team No Sequence No.

Hundred

Property

Mapsheet No.

MGA Zone Easting Northing

Section

Owner

Mapsheet Name Altitude

Estimated Reliability

m

E mm N mm

(from inside black edge to prick point)

Direction N

Photo No.

(Prick the Aerial Photo!)

Aerial Photo Svy.No.

Quadrat Photo No.

Location Map and Description

Location Comments

PID1. SITE DESCRIPTIONPHYSICAL DATASHEET

2. LOCATION DETAILS (LOC)

0 - 50m

Map APD GPS DGPS

51 - 100m 101 - 250m 654 251 - 500m 501m - 1km 1 - 10km

Method GPS accuracy Waypoint No.

(Office use only)

revised 9.9.02

(Site Identifier)

52 53 54

(circle appropriate box)

(provide clear drawing as these will be scanned)

(circle appropriate box)

(circle appropriate box)

1 32 4WGS84 AGD84 AGD66 GDA94Datum(circle appropriate box)

(provide written description of local directions to the site, and mark site photo location and direction)

SURVEY NAME

1

REMNANT VEGETATION SURVEY - No

Page 134: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

128

3. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION (PHY)General Landscape Description (*PHY)

(estimate if unknown )

ALF = Alluvial fan FLO = Floodplain CON = Consolidated Dunefield ESC = EscarpmentALP = Alluvial plain PLA = Plain DUN = Dunefield HIL = HillBEA = Beach ridge plain TID = Tidal Flat LON = Longitudinal dunefield LOW = Low hillsSAN = Sand plain PAR = Parabolic dunefield MOU = Mountains

RIS = Rises

Landform Pattern

Landform Element

100 = Plain (incl.undulating plain)200 = Dune/consolidated dune 301 = Hill crest 400 = Stream channel101 = Sandy plain 201 = Dune crest 302 = Hill slope 451 = Flood out104 = Limestone plain 202 = Dune slope 303 = Hill footslope 453 = Fan-alluvial150 = Rock outcrop (on plain) 203 = Dune footslope 306 = Ridge 460 = Estuary151 = Inselberg / Tor 210 = Swale 321 = Gully 500 = Lake160 = Drainage depression 211 = Interdune corridor 322 = Gorge 510 = Salt lake811 = Open depression 600 = Beach 330 = Cliff 520 = Swamp812 = Closed depression 610 = Beach ridge 331 = Cliff footslope 521 = Perched swamp820 = Flat 620 = Fore dune 360 = Rock outcrop (on hill) 110 = Playa/Pan990 = Other (please specify) 630 = Lagoon 120 = Lunette

Comments (specify if other)

Site Slope (if zero slope (0) then putzero (0) in aspect)

Site Aspect

Surface Strew Size

Outcrop lithology

Outcrop cover

Surface Strew Cover

9 = none apparent

1 = <10%9 = nil 2 = 10 - 50% 3 = > 50%

3 = boulder (gt 250mm)2 = cobble (51-250mm)1 = pebble (5-50mm)

N (Due North = 360°)

(Surface stone)

110 Calcareous material 160 Laterite (ironstone) 310 Quartz120 Sandstone 220 Quartzite 330 Granite130 Siltstone 230 Gneiss 777 Not identified140 Shale 240 Schist

110 Calcareous material 160 Laterite (ironstone) 310 Quartz120 Sandstone 220 Quartzite 330 Granite130 Siltstone 230 Gneiss 777 Not identified140 Shale 240 Schist

Comments (specify if other)

9 = nil 1 = <10% 2 = 10-30% 3 = 30-70% 4 = >70%

Surface Strew Lithology

Fire Scars Y/N Year of last fire Is year of last fire certain? Y/N

Plant Litter %Bare Earth %

Comments

Outcrop comment(Other lithology or subdominant)

Surface Strew comment(Other lithology or subdominant)

(Sum of Bare Earth & Litter does not need to equate to 100%)

2revised 9.9.02

Page 135: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

129

4 DISTURBANCE

AT

BH

BQ

CL

CR

DR

EA

FB

Access Tracks

Bee Hives

Borrow/Quarry Pit

Cleared land within 30m radius ofquadrat

Coppice Regrowth

Drains

Earthmoving/Earthworks

Fire Breaks

FL

OR

PL

RD

RV

SL

SR

WP

Fence Lines

Off-road Vehicles

Power Lines

Rubbish Dumping

Remnant Vegetation adjoins roadsidenative vegetationSlashing

Sprays (weed or plant growth control)

Watering Points

Disturbance Impacts (DIS) (Within 30 metre radius of quadrat) Circle = present. Cross through = absent. (show on map if possible)

D T B S M

Disturbance Comments (*DIS) (indicate other disturbances)

Vertebrate Presence Comments (*VPR) (ie. grazed/severe rabbit activity/active wombat warrens/ mallee fowl mound active/specify

other vertebrates/landholder sightings)

6 SOILS

Soil Comments (*SOI)

Surface Soil Texture ClassS = sand L = loam CLS = clay loam,sandy MC = medium clayLS = loamy sand ZL = silty loam ZCL = silty clay loam MHC = medium heavy clayCS = clayey sand SCL = sandy clay loam LC = light clay HC = heavy claySL = sandy loam CL = clay loam LMC = light medium clay P = peat

5 VERTEBRATE PRESENCE (VPR)

(SOI)

For animals present indicate Y/N for D,T,B,S & M

D= DungT = TracksB = Burrows/Warrens/Nests S = SightingsM = Material (ie Skeletal/Fur/Feathers)

Erosion Comments (*ERO) (eg active gullying)

BA

CT

EM

Bandicoot

Cat

Cattle

Dog/Dingo

Echidna

Emu

Fox FO

Goat GO

Hare HA

Horse HO

D T B S M

KA

KO

PI

Kangaroo

Koala

Macropod

Mallee Fowl

OtherVertebratesPig

Possum PO

Rabbit RA

Reptiles RE

Sheep SH

Wombat WO

Circle = present. Cross through = absent

3revised 9.9.02

Page 136: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

130

9 OVERSTOREY MEASUREMENTS (OVE)

Canopy Type %

(Estimate average canopy type foroverstorey species measured)

(TAKE TEN ESTIMATES)

View the quadrat in cross section to distinguish stratum and to determine overstorey height range. For overstorey, measure 10 individuals ordiscrete foliage clumps of any species that occurs in the broad lifeform category that corresponds to the structural description completed above.Broad lifeforms include trees, mallees and shrubs. Include all individuals regardless of height, except where there is a recognisable height gapcorresponding to a separate lower stratum. For those circumstances where two lifeforms are codominant include measurements of both.

To be filled out and transfered to the Vegetation Sheet

4

Overstorey Height (m)

Canopy Depth (m)

Canopy Diameter (m)

Gap (m)

Additional Photos taken at site (photos taken elsewhere to be entered on separate photo sheet)

Film/PhotoNo.

Direction Photographersinitials

Description (please include voucher number if taking photo of voucher specimen)

If found please return to Environmental Analysis and Research UnitInformation Analysis and Access Branch, Department for Environment and HeritagePO Box 550Marleston SA 5033

revised 9.9.02

Page 137: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

0 0

Film Frame

YYMMDD quadsiteMap(3 initials)

(of location)321

1 32 4

N

Data Entrant(3 initials)(Office use only)

DateObservers

(3 initials)Photographer

Field Order

Site No.

Team No Sequence No.

Hundred

Property

Mapsheet No.

MGA Zone Easting Northing

Section

Owner

Mapsheet Name Altitude

Estimated Reliability

m

E mm N mm

(from inside black edge to prick point)

Direction N

Photo No.

(Prick the Aerial Photo!)

Aerial Photo Svy.No.

Quadrat Photo No.

Location Map and Description

Location Comments

PID1. SITE DESCRIPTIONPHYSICAL DATASHEET

2. LOCATION DETAILS (LOC)

0 - 50m

Map APD GPS DGPS

51 - 100m 101 - 250m 654 251 - 500m 501m - 1km 1 - 10km

Method GPS accuracy Waypoint No.

(Office use only)

revised 9.9.02

(Site Identifier)

52 53 54

(circle appropriate box)

(provide clear drawing as these will be scanned)

(circle appropriate box)

(circle appropriate box)

1 32 4WGS84 AGD84 AGD66 GDA94Datum(circle appropriate box)

(provide written description of local directions to the site, and mark site photo location and direction)

SURVEY NAME

1

REMNANT VEGETATION SURVEY - No

EXAMPLE

Southern Eyre Peninsula

River Murray NP DEH - Ngak Indau Wetland

O 9 O 1 O 3

2 8 O 7

4 5 O 5 O 1 1 O

O 4 O

98 191

2 8 1 O

GO PAST BHP SHEDS HEADING WSW, GO 24O M PAST LAST CORNER OF TRIANGULARLOOP. HEAD NORTH OF TRACK ABOUT 2O M TO START OF QUADRAT.

TO LINCOLN COVE MARINA

BHP PROPERTYMALLEE SCRUB

RABBITWARREN

BHP SHEDS

TRAIN LINE

JUSOO6O1

2O m

BITUMEN ROAD

6 O 2 8 2 1O

O 8 O

K L G P J L

K L G

J U S O O 6 O 1

JUSSIEU

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

131

Page 138: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

132

3. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION (PHY)General Landscape Description (*PHY)

(estimate if unknown )

ALF = Alluvial fan FLO = Floodplain CON = Consolidated Dunefield ESC = EscarpmentALP = Alluvial plain PLA = Plain DUN = Dunefield HIL = HillBEA = Beach ridge plain TID = Tidal Flat LON = Longitudinal dunefield LOW = Low hillsSAN = Sand plain PAR = Parabolic dunefield MOU = Mountains

RIS = Rises

Landform Pattern

Landform Element

100 = Plain (incl.undulating plain)200 = Dune/consolidated dune 301 = Hill crest 400 = Stream channel101 = Sandy plain 201 = Dune crest 302 = Hill slope 451 = Flood out104 = Limestone plain 202 = Dune slope 303 = Hill footslope 453 = Fan-alluvial150 = Rock outcrop (on plain) 203 = Dune footslope 306 = Ridge 460 = Estuary151 = Inselberg / Tor 210 = Swale 321 = Gully 500 = Lake160 = Drainage depression 211 = Interdune corridor 322 = Gorge 510 = Salt lake811 = Open depression 600 = Beach 330 = Cliff 520 = Swamp812 = Closed depression 610 = Beach ridge 331 = Cliff footslope 521 = Perched swamp820 = Flat 620 = Fore dune 360 = Rock outcrop (on hill) 110 = Playa/Pan990 = Other (please specify) 630 = Lagoon 120 = Lunette

Comments (specify if other)

Site Slope (if zero slope (0) then putzero (0) in aspect)

Site Aspect

Surface Strew Size

Outcrop lithology

Outcrop cover

Surface Strew Cover

9 = none apparent

1 = <10%9 = nil 2 = 10 - 50% 3 = > 50%

3 = boulder (gt 250mm)2 = cobble (51-250mm)1 = pebble (5-50mm)

N (Due North = 360°)

(Surface stone)

110 Calcareous material 160 Laterite (ironstone) 310 Quartz120 Sandstone 220 Quartzite 330 Granite130 Siltstone 230 Gneiss 777 Not identified140 Shale 240 Schist

110 Calcareous material 160 Laterite (ironstone) 310 Quartz120 Sandstone 220 Quartzite 330 Granite130 Siltstone 230 Gneiss 777 Not identified140 Shale 240 Schist

Comments (specify if other)

9 = nil 1 = <10% 2 = 10-30% 3 = 30-70% 4 = >70%

Surface Strew Lithology

Fire Scars Y/N Year of last fire Is year of last fire certain? Y/N

Plant Litter %Bare Earth %

Comments

Outcrop comment(Other lithology or subdominant)

Surface Strew comment(Other lithology or subdominant)

(Sum of Bare Earth & Litter does not need to equate to 100%)

2revised 9.9.02

EXAMPLE

3 O 2

O 4

2

1 8 8

1 1 O

1 1 O

1

3

5 5O

N

LOTS OF MASS ` 3O%

APPROXIMATELY 1/2 PEBBLE AND 1/2 COBBLE

GENTLY INCLINED SLOPE OF SMALL RISE

R I S

Page 139: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

133

4 DISTURBANCE

AT

BH

BQ

CL

CR

DR

EA

FB

Access Tracks

Bee Hives

Borrow/Quarry Pit

Cleared land within 30m radius ofquadrat

Coppice Regrowth

Drains

Earthmoving/Earthworks

Fire Breaks

FL

OR

PL

RD

RV

SL

SR

WP

Fence Lines

Off-road Vehicles

Power Lines

Rubbish Dumping

Remnant Vegetation adjoins roadsidenative vegetationSlashing

Sprays (weed or plant growth control)

Watering Points

Disturbance Impacts (DIS) (Within 30 metre radius of quadrat) Circle = present. Cross through = absent. (show on map if possible)

D T B S M

Disturbance Comments (*DIS) (indicate other disturbances)

Vertebrate Presence Comments (*VPR) (ie. grazed/severe rabbit activity/active wombat warrens/ mallee fowl mound active/specify

other vertebrates/landholder sightings)

6 SOILS

Soil Comments (*SOI)

Surface Soil Texture ClassS = sand L = loam CLS = clay loam,sandy MC = medium clayLS = loamy sand ZL = silty loam ZCL = silty clay loam MHC = medium heavy clayCS = clayey sand SCL = sandy clay loam LC = light clay HC = heavy claySL = sandy loam CL = clay loam LMC = light medium clay P = peat

5 VERTEBRATE PRESENCE (VPR)

(SOI)

For animals present indicate Y/N for D,T,B,S & M

D= DungT = TracksB = Burrows/Warrens/Nests S = SightingsM = Material (ie Skeletal/Fur/Feathers)

Erosion Comments (*ERO) (eg active gullying)

BA

CT

CA

DD

EC

EM

Bandicoot

Cat

Cattle

Dog/Dingo

Echidna

Emu

Fox FO

Goat GO

Hare HA

Horse HO

D T B S M

KA

KO

MA

MF

OV

PI

Kangaroo

Koala

Macropod

Mallee Fowl

OtherVertebratesPig

Possum PO

Rabbit RA

Reptiles RE

Sheep SH

Wombat WO

Circle = present. Cross through = absent

3revised 9.9.02

EXAMPLE

RABBIT BUCK HEAPS PRESENT, LARGE WARREN 25 m OUT OF QUADRAT.

Y N N N N

C S

Y N N N N

Page 140: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

134

9 OVERSTOREY MEASUREMENTS (OVE)

Canopy Type %

(Estimate average canopy type foroverstorey species measured)

(TAKE TEN ESTIMATES)

View the quadrat in cross section to distinguish stratum and to determine overstorey height range. For overstorey, measure 10 individuals ordiscrete foliage clumps of any species that occurs in the broad lifeform category that corresponds to the structural description completed above.Broad lifeforms include trees, mallees and shrubs. Include all individuals regardless of height, except where there is a recognisable height gapcorresponding to a separate lower stratum. For those circumstances where two lifeforms are codominant include measurements of both.

To be filled out and transfered to the Vegetation Sheet

4

Overstorey Height (m)

Canopy Depth (m)

Canopy Diameter (m)

Gap (m)

Additional Photos taken at site (photos taken elsewhere to be entered on separate photo sheet)

Film/PhotoNo.

Direction Photographersinitials

Description (please include voucher number if taking photo of voucher specimen)

If found please return to Environmental Analysis and Research UnitInformation Analysis and Access Branch, Department for Environment and HeritagePO Box 550Marleston SA 5033

revised 9.9.02

EXAMPLE

3 4.4 4.8 4.9 3.6 4.5 3.8 4.O 3.7 3.9

O.7 2.6 1 1.4 1.2 1 O.9 O.8 1.1 1.8

O.6 4.5 3.2 1.8 2.4 1.8 3 2.6 2.O 3.6

3.5 1.2 O.8 O O.2 2.8 1 O.5 O.3 O.8

55

Page 141: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

135

PID

Survey No.

Quadrat Size (if not 30x30m)

Data Entrant(3 initials)

(tick if 30 x 30m)(Vegetation Site Dimensions)

Date(3 initials)

Observers

Reliable data, good rainfall preceding survey, ensuring the presence of seasonal vegetation in addition to perennial vegetation; inagricultural areas winter rainfall precedes the survey.Moderately reliable data, recorded during dry conditions making it likely that the seasonal component of vegetation is underrepresented; in agricultural areas summer conditions precede the survey.

SpeciesLSAD

Previouslycollected

Voucher No.

VoucherNo. /Comments

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

*Final corrected species will be written in the shaded area

SURVEY NAME

CALF

Climatic Conditions W = Wet

D = Dry

Vegetation Association Description Flag the dominant/codominant overstorey, understorey and emergent species in column AD onthe plantlist for;

- up to 3 overstorey species - up to 3 emergent species - up to 5 understorey species*Note

Dominant/ Codominant overstorey species are defined as species that dominate the tallest layer that has a canopy cover of ≥ 5%. If there are no layers that have a canopycover ≥ 5% then the dominant/ codominant overstorey species are defined as species that dominate the tallest layer which has the maximum recorded cover/abundance(check plantlist).An emergent species is defined as a species that emerges above the overstorey and occupies a stratum that has a canopy cover of less than 5%.

AD

O E U

Field OrderTeam No Sequence No.

5

7. VEGETATION DESCRIPTION (PLA)VEGETATION DATASHEET

quadsiteMapSite No.(Site Identifier)

revised 9.9.02

Page 142: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Species Previouslycollected

Voucher No.Voucher

No./Comments

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

*Final corrected species will be written in the shaded areaLSAD CALF

6revised 9.9.02

136

Page 143: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

137

8 VEGETATION ASSOCIATION DESCRIPTION (PLA)

T / _____ , M / _____ , LA / _____ , LB / _____ ,

KT / _____ , KS / _____ , S / _____ , SA / _____ ,

SB / _____ , SC / _____ , SD / _____ , P / _____ ,

H / _____ , GT / _____ , GL / _____ , J / _____ ,

VT / _____ , VL / _____ , V / _____ , MI / _____ ,

X / ______ , MO / _____ , LI / ______,

Upper Stratum Age Class (for dominant / codominant species) Circle = present. Cross through = absent.

Assemblage Information: Vegetation Structural Summary : ( From highest to lowest stratum ) :

Life form height class LF / Canopy Cover C ; (This should be filled out from viewing the quadrat not from the plant list

- Cross through if not applicable ie. KT/_____ )Note: All life forms LF with significantly high cover/abundance recorded in the

plant list should also occur here.

9 OVERSTOREY MEASUREMENTS (OVE)

Canopy Type %

(Estimate average canopy type foroverstorey species measured)

10 OVERALL COMMENTS (COM)(on Vegetation of the Site ) : Optional(*VEG)

Describe the vegetation structure, using the SA Structural Formation Table, based on the average height of the overstoreyas you view it.

Check that the column on the plant list is completed - for explanation see above plant list*Note

If two different lifeforms are more or less codominant eg. a Mallee / Callitris mix, then use the average of both to allocate a height class andthe most prevalent or conspicuous lifeform to select a name. Combine both in determining the overstorey projective foliage cover.

Seedling ( <1m )

Sapling (juvenile)

Mature

Senescent

Hollows

Comments

SE

SA

MA

SN

HO

(TAKE TEN ESTIMATES)

PLEASE MARK ANY MAPPABLE VEGETATION BOUNDARIES ON THE AERIAL PHOTOS.

(Tree layer only)

(refer to Muir’s table)

Structural Description ( Using SA Structural Formation Table )......................................................................................

View quadrat in cross section to distinguish stratum and to determine overstorey height range. For overstorey, measure 10 individuals or discretefoliage clumps of any species that occurs in the broad lifeform category that corresponds to the structural description completed above. Broadlifeforms include trees, mallees and shrubs. Include all individuals regardless of height, except where there is a recognisable height gapcorresponding to a separate lower stratum. For those circumstances where two lifeforms are codominant include measurements of both.

AD

Vegetation Association Description cont.

7

Overstorey Height (m)

Canopy Depth (m)

Canopy Diameter (m)

Gap (m)

revised 9.9.02

Page 144: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

138

Species Previouslycollected

Voucher No.Voucher

No./Comments

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

*Final corrected species will be written in the shaded areaLSAD CALF

Page 145: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

139

PID

Survey No.

Quadrat Size (if not 30x30m)

Data Entrant(3 initials)

(tick if 30 x 30m)(Vegetation Site Dimensions)

Date(3 initials)

Observers

Reliable data, good rainfall preceding survey, ensuring the presence of seasonal vegetation in addition to perennial vegetation; inagricultural areas winter rainfall precedes the survey.Moderately reliable data, recorded during dry conditions making it likely that the seasonal component of vegetation is underrepresented; in agricultural areas summer conditions precede the survey.

SpeciesLSAD

Previouslycollected

Voucher No.

VoucherNo. /Comments

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

*Final corrected species will be written in the shaded area

SURVEY NAME

CALF

Climatic Conditions W = Wet

D = Dry

Vegetation Association Description Flag the dominant/codominant overstorey, understorey and emergent species in column AD onthe plantlist for;

- up to 3 overstorey species - up to 3 emergent species - up to 5 understorey species*Note

Dominant/ Codominant overstorey species are defined as species that dominate the tallest layer that has a canopy cover of ≥ 5%. If there are no layers that have a canopycover ≥ 5% then the dominant/ codominant overstorey species are defined as species that dominate the tallest layer which has the maximum recorded cover/abundance(check plantlist).An emergent species is defined as a species that emerges above the overstorey and occupies a stratum that has a canopy cover of less than 5%.

AD

O E U

Field OrderTeam No Sequence No.

5

7. VEGETATION DESCRIPTION (PLA)VEGETATION DATASHEET

quadsiteMapSite No.(Site Identifier)

revised 9.9.02

EXAMPLE

Eucalyptus rugosa B58O-1475 O KT 3 FIMB

Eucalyptus oleosa -1475 O KT 3 IFMB

Acacia anceps -1482 SB T BI

Pimelea serpyllifolia -1480 SC T F

Exocarpus aphyllus -1488 S I IMBF

Southern Eyre Peninsula

1 7 1 O 9 8

2 8 O 7

1

O 8 O

K L G P J L J U S O O 6 O 1

Page 146: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Species Previouslycollected

Voucher No.Voucher

No./Comments

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

*Final corrected species will be written in the shaded areaLSAD CALF

6revised 9.9.02

Eucalyptus rugosa B58O-1475 O KT 3 FIMB

Eucalyptus oleosa -1475 O KT 3 IFMB

Acacia anceps -1482 SB T BI

Pimelea serpyllifolia -1480 SC T F

Exocarpus aphyllus -1488 S I IMBF

EXAMPLE

140

Page 147: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

141

8 VEGETATION ASSOCIATION DESCRIPTION (PLA)

T / _____ , M / _____ , LA / _____ , LB / _____ ,

KT / _____ , KS / _____ , S / _____ , SA / _____ ,

SB / _____ , SC / _____ , SD / _____ , P / _____ ,

H / _____ , GT / _____ , GL / _____ , J / _____ ,

VT / _____ , VL / _____ , V / _____ , MI / _____ ,

X / ______ , MO / _____ , LI / ______,

Upper Stratum Age Class (for dominant / codominant species) Circle = present. Cross through = absent.

Assemblage Information: Vegetation Structural Summary : ( From highest to lowest stratum ) :

Life form height class LF / Canopy Cover C ; (This should be filled out from viewing the quadrat not from the plant list

- Cross through if not applicable ie. KT/_____ )Note: All life forms LF with significantly high cover/abundance recorded in the

plant list should also occur here.

9 OVERSTOREY MEASUREMENTS (OVE)

Canopy Type %

(Estimate average canopy type foroverstorey species measured)

10 OVERALL COMMENTS (COM)(on Vegetation of the Site ) : Optional(*VEG)

Describe the vegetation structure, using the SA Structural Formation Table, based on the average height of the overstoreyas you view it.

Check that the column on the plant list is completed - for explanation see above plant list*Note

If two different lifeforms are more or less codominant eg. a Mallee / Callitris mix, then use the average of both to allocate a height class and

Seedling ( <1m )

Sapling (juvenile)

Mature

Senescent

Hollows

Comments

SE

SA

MA

SN

HO

(TAKE TEN ESTIMATES)

PLEASE MARK ANY MAPPABLE VEGETATION BOUNDARIES ON THE AERIAL PHOTOS.

(Tree layer only)

(refer to Muir’s table)

Structural Description ( Using SA Structural Formation Table )......................................................................................

View quadrat in cross section to distinguish stratum and to determine overstorey height range. For overstorey, measure 10 individuals or discretefoliage clumps of any species that occurs in the broad lifeform category that corresponds to the structural description completed above. Broadlifeforms include trees, mallees and shrubs. Include all individuals regardless of height, except where there is a recognisable height gapcorresponding to a separate lower stratum. For those circumstances where two lifeforms are codominant include measurements of both.

AD

Vegetation Association Description cont.

7

Overstorey Height (m)

Canopy Depth (m)

Canopy Diameter (m)

Gap (m)

revised 9.9.02

EXAMPLE

3 4.4 4.8 4.9 3.6 4.5 3.8 4.O 3.7 3.9

O.7 2.6 1 1.4 1.2 1 O.9 O.8 1.1 1.8

O.6 4.5 3.2 1.8 2.4 1.8 3 2.6 2.O 3.6

3.5 1.2 O.8 O O.2 2.8 1 O.5 O.3 O.8

55

Mallee

c r

r

r

r r

r

r

r

c

i

Page 148: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

142

Species Previouslycollected

Voucher No.Voucher

No./Comments

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

64

65

66

67

68

69

*Final corrected species will be written in the shaded areaLSAD CALF

EXAMPLE

Eucalyptus rugosa B58O-1475 O KT 3 FIMB

Eucalyptus oleosa -1475 O KT 3 IFMB

Acacia anceps -1482 SB T BI

Pimelea serpyllifolia -1480 SC T F

Exocarpus aphyllus -1488 S I IMBF

Page 149: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

143

Page 150: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

144

Page 151: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

145

Page 152: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

146

Page 153: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 147

Techniques 2 and 3

Data recording – Photopoint monitoring data sheet

This data sheet should be used with a site description data sheet (Appendix 3).

The following descriptions are adapted from Heard and Channon 1997.

Site name: If you are taking photographs for the baseline vegetation monitoring, fill in the threeletter and four digit site code for the baseline survey quadrat. If you are taking photographs forother monitoring purposes, allocate a site name using the standard method.

Wetland name: Fill in the full name of the wetland in which you are working.

Date: Use DD/MM/YY format.

Observers: Record three initials for each observer.

Technique: Record the technique being used with the photograph (eg baseline vegetationinventory, Technique 1 or ongoing vegetation monitoring, Technique 5.

Vegetation association: Write the name of the vegetation association in which the photograph istaken, based on the findings of the vegetation baseline monitoring. If the photograph is not beingused in conjunction with baseline vegetation monitoring, Technique 1, then cross out the box.

Film code / Frame number: Allocate a letter code to the film you are using and then clearly labelthe canister once it is finished (eg A). Write this film code and the frame number on the data sheetin the boxes provided.

Direction of photograph: Using a citing compass, record the direction in which the photograph wastaken. If you are taking panoramic photographs (see baseline photopoint monitoring Technique 2),take a bearing on the first and last photograph in the panoramic series.

Photograph sketch: Sketch in the key features in the field of view of the photograph. Note the key species on the sketch.

Comments: Describe the key features of the sketch/photograph, particularly the key species and lifestage.

***Remember that this photopoint monitoring data sheet needs to be used in conjunction with thesite description data sheet.

Appendix 8 PHOTOPOINT MONITORING

Page 154: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual148

Site Name Wetland

Date Observers DD MM YY

Technique Veg Association (if revelant)

Film Code Frame Number

Direction of Photograph

Photograph sketch

Comments: (describe key features of photograph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Note: You need to use this data sheet with the site description data sheet (see Appendix 3).

Appendix 8 PHOTO POINT MONITORING Page ___ of ___

Techniques 2, 3

Page 155: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 149

Site Name Wetland

Date Observers DD MM YY

Technique Veg Association (if revelant)

Film Code Frame Number

Direction of Photograph

Photograph sketch

Comments: (describe key features of photograph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Note: You need to use this data sheet with the site description data sheet (see Appendix 3).

Appendix 8 PHOTO POINT MONITORING Page ___ of ___

Techniques 2, 3

B L A O 1 O O Black Stump Wetland

1 - baseline veg map Sedge zone (mixed)

R J T P T D

Water only 3/4 filling wetland - several different species at edge ofwater - some curly pond weed germinating in shallow water but notvisible in photo - see baseline data sheet.

23Oº

water only 3/4 full

hairy carpet weed

common sedge

red gum

1 1

EXAMPLE

O 9 O 1 O 3

1 1

Page 156: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual150

Technique 4 Data recording – Tree health assessment data sheet

When this data is being collected as part of the baseline vegetation inventory (Technique 1), thisdata sheet can be used alone. However, if additional sites are being surveyed for tree health, thesite description data sheet should also be used (see Appendix 3).

Site name: If you are collecting the data as part of the baseline vegetation monitoring, fill in thethree letter and four digit site code for the baseline survey quadrat. If you are assessing treehealth at other locations, allocate a site name using the standard method.

Wetland name: Fill in the full name of the wetland you are working in.

Date: Use DD/MM/YY format

Observers: Record three initials for each observer.

Species name: List each tree species that is assessed, eg river red gum, river coobah

Tree 1 – 10: Assess all tree species (including living and dead) represented in the vegetation beingsampled. Using the Tree Health Assessment (see Table 4 in main document), rate trees from 5 to 0for a total of 10 individual trees. If a mix of tree species is present, then assess the 10 trees inproportion to dominance/codominance.

For example: 80% E.camaldulensis (river red gum) and 20% E. largiflorens (black box) = rate 8 x E.camaldulensisand 2 x E.largiflorens (living or dead). This may involve assessing trees outside the quadrat innearby surrounds if 10 are not present within the quadrat.

Comments: Record information that will assist in relocating individual trees for future monitoring.

Appendix 9 TREE HEALTH ASSESSMENT

Page 157: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

151

Site

Nam

e

Wet

land

D

ate

Obs

erve

rs

DD

M

M

YY

Spe

cies

Nam

eTr

ee 1

Tree

2Tr

ee 3

Tree

4Tr

ee 5

Tree

6Tr

ee 7

Tree

8Tr

ee 9

Tree

10

Ap

pen

dix

9T

RE

E H

EA

LTH

AS

SE

SS

ME

NT

Pag

e __

_ of

___

Tech

niq

ue

4

Com

men

ts

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

..

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

Page 158: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

152

Site

Nam

e

Wet

land

D

ate

Obs

erve

rs

DD

M

M

YY

Spe

cies

Nam

eTr

ee 1

Tree

2Tr

ee 3

Tree

4Tr

ee 5

Tree

6Tr

ee 7

Tree

8Tr

ee 9

Tree

10

Ap

pen

dix

9T

RE

E H

EA

LTH

AS

SE

SS

ME

NT

Pag

e __

_ of

___

Tech

niq

ue

4

Com

men

ts

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

...

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

....

...

B L

A

O 1

O

OBl

ack

Stum

p W

etla

nd

Red

gum

54

O5

45

5

Blac

k bo

x5

Coob

ah4

4

R J

T

P T

D

EX

AM

PL

E

O 9

O

1

O 3

1

1

Page 159: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 153

Techniques 5

Data recording – Fine scale vegetation monitoring data sheet

This data sheet should be used in conjunction with the site description data sheet in Appendix 3.

The following descriptions are adapted from Heard and Channon 2.

Site name: Use the standard method of allocating the site numbers. In the first three spaces fill inthe first three letters of the wetland name and in the last four spaces fill in the number site code(eg site one Lake Merreti would be MER 01 00).

Wetland name: Fill in the full name of the wetland in which you are working.

Date: Use DD/MM/YY format.

Observers: Record three initials for each observer.

Method: Record the method being used in the survey (eg quadrats or line intercept).

Quadrat Size: Record the dimensions of the quadrat being used (eg 20m X 20m).

GPS Position: Using a GPS, record the eastings and northings at the beginning of your transect.

Bearing: Record the bearing on which you establish your transect of quadrats.

Weather: Record the code that best describes the weather conditions prior to the survey. Theseconditions may influence the species’ diversity and abundance of seasonal vegetation.

Quadrat number/Distance: Record the number of the quadrat you are surveying (quadrat based) orthe distance covered by each district vegetation zone (line intercept). Species surveyed should berecorded in the columns adjacent to the quadrat number.

Species cover and life stage: Record the species name or voucher number in the first row. Theshaded column below each species is used to record the final identification of the plant if it differsfrom the field identification.

Adjacent to the quadrat number/distance you are surveying, record cover estimates for each of thespecies (you could either use real estimates or cover categories suggesed by “Guide to NativeVegetation Survey” (see Table A10.1).

In the shaded area next to the cover value, record the life stage code. Enter the life stage codethat applies to greater than 10% of the individuals in the quadrat. Use the life stage codes inTable A10.2 (adapted from Heard and Channon 1997) 2.

Appendix 10 FINE SCALE VEGETATION MONITORING

Page 160: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Table A10.1: Codes for classifying plant cover.

Code Description

N Not many (1-10 plants and< 5% cover)

T Sparsely present; cover small (less than 5% cover)

1 Plentiful, but small cover (less than 5%)

2 Any number of individuals covering 5-25% of area

3 Any number of individuals covering 25-50% of area

4 Any number of individuals covering 50-75% of area

5 Covering more than 75% of area

Codes adapted from Braun-Blanquet system

Table A10.2: Codes for classifying life stage of plants

Code Description

V = Vegetative Plants in the non-reproductive phase ie no flowers, buds or fruits

S = Seedling Small tree less than 50cm high

Sa = Sapling Small tree greater than 50cm high

D = Dead/dormant Indicates that the above ground part of the plant is without green foliage

F = Flowering Plants are in flower

R = Regenerating When a plant with significant loss of foliage is re-shooting

B = Budding/fruits Plants that have buds or fruits in various stages of development

X = Recently shed Plants that are in a non-reproductive stage but there is evidence of havingdeveloped fruits or set seed.

your wetland - monitoring manual154

Appendix 10

Page 161: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

155

Site

Nam

e

Wet

land

D

ate

Obs

erve

rs

DD

M

M

YY

Met

hod

Qua

drat

Siz

e (m

)

GP

S P

ositi

on:

Eas

ting

Nor

thin

g

Bea

ring

Wea

ther

W =

rai

nfal

l a f

ew d

ays

prio

r to

sur

vey

D

= n

o ra

infa

ll pr

ior

to s

urve

y

Spe

cies

cov

er/L

ife s

tage

Qua

drat

num

ber/

Dis

tanc

e (m

)

Ap

pen

dix

10

FIN

E S

CA

LE

VE

GE

TAT

ION

MO

NIT

OR

ING

P

age

___

of _

__

Tech

niq

ue

5

Page 162: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

156

Qua

drat

num

ber/

Dis

tanc

e (m

)

SP

EC

IES

NA

ME

, CO

VE

R A

ND

LIF

E S

TAG

ES

Page 163: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

157

Site

Nam

e

Wet

land

D

ate

Obs

erve

rs

DD

M

M

YY

Met

hod

Qua

drat

Siz

e (m

)

GP

S P

ositi

on:

Eas

ting

Nor

thin

g

Bea

ring

Wea

ther

W =

rai

nfal

l a f

ew d

ays

prio

r to

sur

vey

D

= n

o ra

infa

ll pr

ior

to s

urve

y

Spe

cies

cov

er/L

ife s

tage

Qua

drat

num

ber/

Dis

tanc

e (m

)

Ap

pen

dix

10

FIN

E S

CA

LE

VE

GE

TAT

ION

MO

NIT

OR

ING

Pag

e __

_ of

___

Tech

niq

ue

5

B L

A

O 1

O

OBl

ack

Stum

p W

etla

nd

n/a

12Oº

BLA

O1

BLA

O2

BLA

O3

BL

A O4

BL

A O5

BLA

O6

Mim

ulus

P

otam

oget

on

Mue

hlenb

ecki

a E

rchy

laena

Aste

r

Myr

iophy

llum

repe

nscr

ispu

sflo

rule

na

tom

ento

sa

subu

latus

ver

ruco

sum

O-1O

1O-1

5

15-1

6

16-2

8

v✔

F

v✔

B

F

v✔

v✔

B

v✔

v

D

R J

T

P T

D

EX

AM

PL

E

O 9

O

1

O 3

3 7

8 O

1 4

62

2 8

8 6

5

1

1

Line

inte

rcep

t

Page 164: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual158

Techniques 6 and 7

Data recording – Soil profile data log

Date: DD/MM/YY format

Wetland name: Fill in the full name of the wetland in which you are working.

Site name: Use a standard method for allocating site names. Fill in the first three letters of thewetland name, and then a site number code (eg site one at Lake Merreti would be MER 01 00).

Depth (cm): Record the depth from the beginning of the soil type to the end of the soil type,starting from the natural land surface (eg 0-30cm).

Texture: Record a description of the soil texture in this category (eg clay or sand or sandy clay).

Colour: Describe the colour of the soil type.

Comments: Write any additional comments about the soil that will help distinguish this layer fromthe other layers and record the presence of groundwater within the soil profile.

Appendix 11 SOIL PROFILE DATA LOG

Page 165: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 159

Date Wetland

DD MM YY

Site Name

Depth Texture Colour Comments

Appendix 11 SOIL PROFILE DATA LOG Page ___ of ___

Techniques 6, 7

Page 166: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual160

Date Wetland

DD MM YY

Site Name

Depth Texture Colour Comments

Appendix 11 SOIL PROFILE DATA LOG Page ___ of ___

Techniques 6, 7 EXAMPLE

B L A O 1 O O

Black Stump Wetland

O-3O cm clay grey

3O-12Ocm clay grey/green damp, iron nodules present

12O-183cm clayey sand grey/brown saturated

183cm final depth

O 9 O 1 O 3

1 1

Page 167: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 161

Appendix 12 PROCESSING SOIL SAMPLES

Use the following calculations to work out the water content and salinity of yoursoil samples (Adapted from information provided by Ian Jolly, CSIRO Land andWater, February 2003, pers. comm.).

Soil water contentGravimetric water content indicates the amount of water in the soil. This can be determined fromthe weight lost by soil samples that have been dried at 105ºC for 24 hours using the followingformula:

θG (g/g) (gravimetric water content) = ((container + msoil, initial) – (container + msoil, dry)) / ((container+ msoil, dry) – container)

Where:msoil, initial is the weight of the wet soil (g), and;msoil, dry is the weight of the dry soil (g).

To accurately determine gravimetric water content, soil samples should be placed directly into anair-tight container upon collection, before weighing, drying and then re-weighing.

Soil salinityHaving determined the gravimetric water content of the soil sample, the dry soil sample can thenbe used to estimate the amount of salt in the soil by measuring the electrical conductivity (EC) of asoil/water solution. The soil/water solution is typically mixed to a 1:5 ratio of soil to water.However, the following formula can be used for any ratio of the weight of dry soil to volume ofwater:

EC in soil water (mS/cm) = measured EC of soil:water solution (mS/cm) * volume of water (mL) /msoil, dry (g) * θG (g/g)

Where:θG is the gravimetric water content (g/g), and;msoil, dry is the weight of the dry soil (g).

The EC in the soil water can be converted to TDS (total dissolved solids) in the soil water using astandard EC to TDS multiplier such as 0.6 (value used throughout the Murray-Darling Basin).

Page 168: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual162

Techniques 6, 7, 8, 9

Data recording – Water quality monitoring data sheet

This data sheet should be used with a site description data sheet (Appendix 3).

Site name: Use a standard method for allocating site names. In the first three spaces fill in the firstthree letters of the wetland name, in the last four spaces fill in a site number code (eg site one atLake Merreti would be MER 01 00).

Wetland name: Fill in the full name of the wetland in which you are working.

Date: DD/MM/YY format.

Observers: Record three initials for each observer.

Groundwater / Surface water: Tick the appropriate box, indicating the type of water qualitymonitoring you are undertaking.

Time: Fill in the time of the survey in 24-hour time (eg 08:30 and 23:00).

Parameter /equipment used/measure/units: This table is where you record your data. Fill in theappropriate boxes adjacent to the parameter being measured. Strike through parameters notmeasured during the survey (eg turbidity, if you are doing groundwater monitoring). For eachparameter, make sure you record the equipment used to carry out the monitoring and the units inwhich the readings are taken. For example, when monitoring conductivity record the type ofmeter used and whether the measurements are in µS/cm or mS/cm.

Comments: If you are setting up groundwater monitoring sites, record the depth to which thepiezometer is put into the ground, and also the amount of pipe above the ground. As youestablish the site, a soil log should also be completed (Appendix 11) to record the pattern ofclay/sandy sediments and measure their thickness as you auger the piezometer into the ground.

Make a note of whether you are sampling for macroinvertebrates at this site. Also record detailsof the techniques used, including the types of plants sampled, the collection method (eg dip net,emergent trap) and the collection effort (eg sweep distance in metres).

Appendix 13 WATER QUALITY MONITORING

Page 169: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 163

Site Name Wetland Name

Date Observers DD MM YY

Groundwater Surface water Time

Appendix 13 WATER QUALITY MONITORING Page ___ of ___

Technique 6, 7, 8, 9

Comments

Prevailing weather (circle)

Cold / cool / mild / hot Sunny / patchy cloud / overcast / cloudy / Fine / drizzle / fog / rain / stormyStill / slight breeze / breezy / gusty / windy / strong winds

Macroinvertebrates collected Y/N

Habitat sampled:Collection technique:

PARAMETER EQUIPMENT USED MEASURE UNITS

Conductivity

Depth

Turbidity

Temperature

Page 170: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual164

Site Name Wetland Name

Date Observers DD MM YY

Groundwater Surface water Time

Appendix 13 WATER QUALITY MONITORING Page ___ of ___

Technique 6, 7, 8, 9

Comments

Prevailing weather (circle)

Cold / cool / mild / hot Sunny / patchy cloud / overcast / cloudy / Fine / drizzle / fog / rain / stormyStill / slight breeze / breezy / gusty / windy / strong winds

Macroinvertebrates collected Y / N

Habitat sampled:Collection technique:

PARAMETER EQUIPMENT USED MEASURE UNITS

Conductivity

Depth

Turbidity

Temperature

pH

EXAMPLE

WTW meter 6O2 EC

Turbidity tube 2O NTU

pH strip 7

O 9 O 1 O 3

1O:OO

1 1

K L G P J L

B L A O 1 O O Black Stump Wetland

Typha & submerged ribbon weedDip net, 1O m sweep

Page 171: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Technique 10

Data recording – Management log data sheet

Date: Use DD/MM/YY format.

Time: Record the time of observations.

Management Stage: Describe the management stage – are you filling or drying your wetland? Is itfull to river level or over bank flooding?

Management action: Record the details of management, eg the number of boards that have beenremoved from the inlet to fill the wetland, or if the inlet is completely closed.

Depth 1 – 4: Measure and record the surface water depth or groundwater depth in your wetland.The number of readings will depend on the number of sites you have allocated for depthmonitoring.

Creek depth: Measure the depth of the creek or river feeding the wetland.

River flow: Find out the flow to South Australia and/or at the closest weir on the day you visit thewetland. You can find this out from SA Water (see www.sawater.com.au/Hot_Data/index.html) orfrom the local news.

Comments: Describe the responses in or around the wetland. This information will help youremember the conditions on the day of your visit. For example record the weather conditions, andmost importantly, record anything out of the ordinary (ie frogs calling, extensive growth of plants,high bird activity, space ships etc).

your wetland - monitoring manual 165

Appendix 14 MANAGEMENT LOG

Page 172: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

166

Wet

land

Dat

eTi

me

Man

agem

ent

Man

agem

ent

Dep

thD

epth

Dep

thD

epth

Cre

ekR

iver

Com

men

tsst

age

actio

n1

23

4de

pth

flow

Ap

pen

dix

14

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

MO

NIT

OR

ING

P

age

___

of _

__

Tech

niq

ue

10

Page 173: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

167

Wet

land

Dat

eTi

me

Man

agem

ent

Man

agem

ent

Dep

thD

epth

Dep

thD

epth

Cre

ekR

iver

Com

men

tsst

age

actio

n1

23

4de

pth

flow

Ap

pen

dix

14

WA

TE

R L

EV

EL

MO

NIT

OR

ING

P

age

___

of _

__

Tech

niq

ue

10E

XA

MP

LE1

1

Blac

k St

ump

Wet

land

1/12

/O2

1Oam

re-f

illin

g1/

2 bo

ards

ope

n15

.2O

16.1

1O O

OO

Wet

land

1/2

full

1O/1

2/O2

1O.3

O am

re-f

illin

g‘’

15.2

5

16.12

1O 5

OO

17/1

2/O2

9am

re-f

illin

g3

/4 b

oard

s op

en15

.26

16.1

1O 1O

O Ra

te o

f fill

ing

redu

ced

took

2 b

oard

s ou

t

Page 174: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual168

Appendix 15 TECHNIQUES FOR SURVEYING FISH POPULATIONSA

dva

nta

ges

Can

est

imat

e fi

sh a

bu

nd

ance

bas

edo

n w

ater

vo

lum

e if

dra

gg

ed o

ver

ase

t ar

ea. C

atch

es f

ish

fro

m e

nti

rew

ater

co

lum

n a

nd

has

th

e p

ote

nti

alto

iden

tify

th

e h

abit

at t

ype

wh

ere

fish

occ

ur.

Easy

to

pu

rch

ase,

eas

y to

op

erat

e,sh

ort

so

rtin

g t

ime,

can

cat

ch f

ish

insh

allo

w w

ater

(as

lon

g a

s th

eo

pen

ing

s ar

e co

vere

d).

Ran

ge

of

fish

siz

es c

an b

e ca

ug

ht

wit

h d

iffe

ren

t m

esh

siz

es, l

ittl

e d

ebri

sca

ug

ht

in n

ets.

Inex

pen

sive

tec

hn

iqu

e. C

an c

atch

mo

re r

are

spec

ies

no

t p

icke

d u

p in

oth

er m

eth

od

s.

Allo

ws

sam

plin

g o

fh

abit

ats

oth

erw

ise

no

t co

vere

d w

ith

oth

er t

ech

niq

ues

(eg

ove

rhan

gin

gg

rass

ban

ks w

ith

sed

enta

ry s

pec

ies)

.R

apid

ass

essm

ent

du

e to

no

t n

eed

ing

to le

ave

trap

s in

th

e w

etla

nd

ove

rnig

ht.

Oth

er s

tud

ies

usi

ng

tec

hn

iqu

eR

efer

to

Ref

eren

ces

65, 6

6, 6

7

65 68

Wh

at is

yo

ur

focu

s /

qu

esti

on

?

Cat

ches

a w

ide

ran

ge

of

smal

l sp

ecie

s. C

an o

nly

be

use

d in

wat

er s

hal

low

eno

ug

h t

o w

alk

in o

rsw

im a

t o

ne

end

.

Sele

ctiv

e to

war

ds

sed

enta

ry s

pec

ies

egg

ud

geo

ns.

Targ

ets

a ra

ng

e o

f si

zecl

asse

s o

f la

rge

spec

ies

wh

en a

ran

ge

of

mes

hsi

zes

is u

sed

.

Cat

ch s

mal

l fis

h(d

epen

din

g o

n m

esh

size

).

Dis

adva

nta

ges

Dif

ficu

lt t

o d

rag

in h

eavi

lyve

get

ated

wet

lan

ds,

len

gth

yso

rtin

g t

ime

du

e to

deb

ris,

inef

fect

ive

in v

ery

shal

low

wat

er, r

equ

ires

pra

ctic

e to

com

ple

te s

ucc

essf

ully

.

Pass

ive

sam

plin

g t

ech

niq

ue

–fi

sh a

re a

ble

to

esc

ape.

Lo

wn

um

ber

s o

f fi

sh c

aug

ht

com

par

ed t

o o

ther

pas

sive

tech

niq

ues

(eg

fyk

e n

ets)

.

Hig

h m

ort

alit

y o

f fi

sh c

aug

ht,

bir

d m

ort

alit

y, in

effe

ctiv

e in

shal

low

wat

er, o

nly

su

itab

lein

low

flo

w c

on

dit

ion

s.R

equ

ires

hig

h le

vel o

fex

per

ien

ce.

Tech

niq

ue

req

uir

es p

ract

ice,

gen

eral

ly c

atch

es lo

wn

um

ber

s o

f fi

sh f

or

the

amo

un

t o

f ef

fort

.

Surv

ey m

eth

od

(fis

h)

Fin

e m

esh

sei

ne

net

(2-1

0mm

)*

Shri

mp

tra

p*

Gill

net

s (r

ang

e o

fm

esh

siz

es)

Lon

g h

and

led

dip

net

(ra

ng

e o

f m

esh

size

s*

Page 175: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 169

Appendix 15

Ad

van

tag

es

Act

ive

sam

plin

g t

ech

niq

ue,

very

eff

icie

nt

met

ho

d e

gla

rge

nu

mb

ers

and

div

ersi

tyo

f fi

sh.

Pass

ive

sam

plin

g t

ech

niq

ue

easi

ly s

et a

nd

ch

ecke

d,

limit

ed a

mo

un

t o

f d

ebri

s to

sort

, cat

ches

a r

ang

e o

f fi

shsi

ze c

lass

es w

ith

on

e m

eth

od

.C

atch

oth

er f

aun

a (e

gm

acro

inve

rteb

rate

s an

dtu

rtle

s), c

an b

e u

sed

in s

low

or

fast

flo

win

g w

ater

.

Oth

er s

tud

ies

usi

ng

tec

hn

iqu

eR

efer

to

Ref

eren

ces

38 34, 3

8

Wh

at is

yo

ur

focu

s /

qu

esti

on

?

Targ

ets

the

enti

re p

op

ula

tio

no

f fi

sh p

rese

nt.

Targ

ets

a ra

ng

e o

f si

ze c

lass

eso

f la

rge

and

sm

all f

ish

if t

he

net

has

fin

e m

esh

.

Dis

adva

nta

ges

Req

uir

es e

xper

tise

an

dex

pen

sive

eq

uip

men

t. P

erm

its

are

on

ly a

vaila

ble

fo

r sp

ecia

llytr

ain

ed s

enio

r o

per

ato

rs. N

ot

reco

mm

end

ed u

nle

ss f

or

exp

erie

nce

d u

sers

.

In d

eep

wat

er u

nab

le t

o c

ove

ren

tire

wat

er c

olu

mn

th

us

on

lya

sub

sam

ple

of

fish

are

cau

gh

t. In

effe

ctiv

e if

wat

ersh

allo

wer

th

an t

he

firs

to

pen

ing

, rel

ies

on

fis

hm

ove

men

t, p

assi

ve g

ear

typ

e.M

ust

be

use

d w

ith

a f

loat

inco

d e

nd

to

en

sure

su

rviv

al o

fai

r b

reat

her

Surv

ey m

eth

od

(fis

h)

Elec

tro

fis

hin

g

Fyke

net

s (r

ang

e o

fo

pen

ing

siz

es)

*

* R

eco

mm

end

ed s

urv

ey t

ech

niq

ues

. In

gen

eral

, a v

arie

ty o

f g

ear

typ

es m

ust

be

use

d s

uch

th

at t

he

typ

es o

verl

ap in

ho

w o

r w

her

e th

ew

ater

co

lum

n/h

abit

ats

are

sam

ple

d. T

his

giv

es a

n o

vera

ll p

ictu

re o

f th

e fi

sh c

om

mu

nit

ies

in t

he

wet

lan

d s

yste

m a

nd

pre

ven

ts t

he

con

clu

sio

n f

rom

bia

s.

Page 176: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual170

Techniques 11 and 12

Data recording – Fish monitoring data sheet

This data sheet should be used with a site description data sheet (Appendix 3).

Site: Use a standard method for allocating the site numbers. In the first three spaces fill in the firstthree letters of the wetland name, in the last four spaces fill in a site number code (eg site one atLake Merreti would be MER 01 00).

Wetland name: Fill in the full name of the wetland in which you are working.

Date: Use DD/MM/YY format.

Observers: Record three initials for each observer.

Fish/Code: If the fish you have caught is not written across the page under the net details, then youwill need to include a code. The common species you are likely to find have an allocated code,which you will find at the top-left corner of the Fish Monitoring data sheet.

Health: If you decide to record health details of your fish, the codes you will need are listed inTable A16.1 and are also on the Fish Monitoring data sheet in the top-right corner.

Net set – start/end: Record the time the net was set (start) and the time the net was collected (end).

Length of net set: Work out how long the net was set for, and record this in the adjacent box.

Net opening: Circle the direction in which the net has been set (upstream / downstream /perpendicular).

Carp/CGU spp/Callop/Gold fish/ Gambus/Flat GU/Bony Bream/ Hardy Head/Smelt/Rainbow/Other: If you are recording the size of the fish you catch, write down the fish length to the nearestmillimetre in the column below the species you caught. When measuring the fish measure to thefork of the tail (if the fish has a forked tail) or top of the tail fin ray (if the tail does not fork).

Codes in this column represent the following species:

Carp = Carp (Cyprinus carpio)CGU spp = Carp gudgeon spp. including all types of Carp gudgeons (Hypseleotris spp)Callop = Callop (Macquaria ambigua)Gold fish = Gold fish (Carrassius auratus)Gambus = Gambusia (Gambusia holbrooki)Flat GU = Flat headed gudgeon (Philypnodon grandiceps)Bony bream = Bony bream (Nemalatosa erebi)Hardy head = Freshwater hardy head (Craterocephalus stercumuscarum)Smelt = Australian smelt (Retropinna semoni)Rainbow = Crimson-spotted rainbow fish (Melanotaenia fluviatilis)Other = Include codes for other species caught (listed at the top of the data sheet).

Appendix 16 FISH MONITORING

Page 177: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 171

If there is a large catch of fish, measure the first 15 randomly selected fish of each species andcount the remainder. If you have species for which there is no specified column, record their codesand length in the ‘other’ column.

Extra: Once you have measured 15 fish of each species, count the remainder of each species andrecord these in the extra box.

Prevailing weather: Circle the conditions that best describe the day of the survey.

General comments: Draw the rough location of the net you are counting in relation to keyfeatures in your wetland (eg inlet). Include any other comments about the conditions on the dayof the survey or about the catch, including if water was flowing into or out of the wetland.

Record the amount of survey effort for active sampling techniques including the length of theseine drag and the time and distance for dip netting.

Record the habitat type of each survey so that the same habitats can be sampled on consequentsurveys.

Appendix 16

Table A16.1: Health codes for fish.

Health code Condition Description

FTP Anchor worm Parasite that is imbedded into the flesh of the fish and or Lernia resembles a fish tag. It is a thin tube approximately 1cm

long, greenish in colour with barbs holding it under the flesh of the fish (Nichols Pers. Obs. 2001).

W Wound An area of the fish that is bleeding or punctured (usually a result of bird attack).

RR Running ripe To be certain a fish is running ripe, you will need to recognise female fish full of eggs (eg by squeezing abdomen gently and seeing eggs or full bellies) and males producing milk (by gently squeezing the abdomen towardsthe anus on large fish seeing the milk seeping from the anus area). Some small fish may also produce distinctive breeding colours when they are running ripe.

F Fin rot When fins on the fish are breaking down or have a fungus growing on them (do not record fin rot if fins are damaged from being in the net).

U Ulcer An area where the scales are raised and bloody.

D Deformity Major deformities such as a bent spine or missing eye.

TC Tumor / cyst Raised areas on the body or head that are not bleeding.

O Other Any other condition that cannot be put into one of the categories above. Describe the condition in the general comments section on the data sheet.

Note: This information should only be collected once trained in identification.

Page 178: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

172

Site

Nam

e

Wet

land

D

ate

Obs

erve

rs

DD

M

M

YY

Ap

pen

dix

16

FIS

H M

ON

ITO

RIN

G

Pag

e __

_ of

___

Tech

niq

ues

11,

12

Net

N

et S

et -

st

art:

en

d:

Leng

th o

f ne

t se

t:

Net

Ope

ning

:

ups

trea

m /

dow

nstr

eam

/ p

erpe

ndic

ular

Car

p C

GU

spp

C

allo

pG

oldf

ish

Gam

bus

Fla

t G

U

Bon

y B

ream

H

ardy

Hea

dS

mel

t R

ainb

ow

Oth

erO

ther

G

EN

ER

AL

CO

MM

EN

TS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 extr

a

Red

finR

ED

Hyb

rid C

arp

HY

BM

irror

Car

pM

IRW

este

rn C

GU

WC

G

Fla

thea

d G

udge

onF

GU

(g)

Dw

arf

Fla

thea

d G

udge

onF

GU

(d)

Long

Nec

k Tu

rtle

LNT

Sho

rt N

eck

Turt

leS

NT

Anc

or W

orm

AW

Wou

ndW

Run

ning

Rip

eR

RF

in R

otF

Def

orm

ityD

Tum

orT

Oth

erO

NO

TE

:F

ish

are

mea

sure

d to

near

est

mm

at

tail

fork

or t

op t

ail f

in r

ay

Pre

vaili

ng

Wea

ther

(ci

rcle

)

cold

/ c

ool /

mild

/ w

arm

/ h

ot

sunn

y/ p

atch

y cl

oud

/ ov

erca

st/

clou

dy

fine

/ dr

izzl

e /

fog

/ ra

in /

sto

rmy

still

/ s

light

bre

eze

/ br

eezy

/ g

usty

extr

a w

indy

/ s

tron

g w

inds

Page 179: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

173

Site

Nam

e

Wet

land

D

ate

Obs

erve

rs

DD

M

M

YY

Ap

pen

dix

16

FIS

H M

ON

ITO

RIN

G

Pag

e __

_ of

___

Tech

niq

ues

11,

12

Net

N

et S

et -

st

art:

en

d:

Leng

th o

f ne

t se

t:

Net

Ope

ning

:

ups

trea

m /

dow

nstr

eam

/ p

erpe

ndic

ular

Car

p C

GU

spp

C

allo

pG

oldf

ish

Gam

bus

Fla

t G

U

Bon

y B

ream

H

ardy

Hea

dS

mel

t R

ainb

ow

Oth

erO

ther

G

EN

ER

AL

CO

MM

EN

TS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 extr

a

Red

finR

ED

Hyb

rid C

arp

HY

BM

irror

Car

pM

IRW

este

rn C

GU

WC

G

Fla

thea

d G

udge

onF

GU

(g)

Dw

arf

Fla

thea

d G

udge

onF

GU

(d)

Long

Nec

k Tu

rtle

LNT

Sho

rt N

eck

Turt

leS

NT

Anc

or W

orm

AW

Wou

ndW

Run

ning

Rip

eR

RF

in R

otF

Def

orm

ityD

Tum

orT

Oth

erO

NO

TE

:F

ish

are

mea

sure

d to

near

est

mm

at

tail

fork

or t

op t

ail f

in r

ay

Pre

vaili

ng

Wea

ther

(ci

rcle

)

cold

/ c

ool /

mild

/ w

arm

/ h

ot

sunn

y/ p

atch

y cl

oud

/ ov

erca

st/

clou

dy

fine

/ dr

izzl

e /

fog

/ ra

in /

sto

rmy

still

/ s

light

bre

eze

/ br

eezy

/ g

usty

extr

a w

indy

/ s

tron

g w

inds

EX

AM

PL

E

255

.515

1.5

15

6.5

LNT(

25)

26.5

3.2

2.6

15.1

16.7

3.9

3

2.5

2.7

3.O

O 9

O

1

O 3

1

1

KL

G

P J

LB

L A

O

1

OO

Blac

k St

ump

Wet

land

1 - F

yke

5pm

7am

14 h

rs

inle

t BLA

O1ne

t 1

net

2

Page 180: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual174

Appendix 17 TECHNIQUES FOR SURVEYING MACROINVERTEBRATESA

dva

nta

ges

Cat

ches

ad

ult

sta

ge

mac

roin

vert

ebra

tes.

Act

ive

sam

plin

g t

ech

niq

ue.

Can

use

th

is t

ech

niq

ue

at a

wid

e ra

ng

e o

f w

ater

leve

ls.

Iso

late

s th

e in

vert

ebra

tes

emer

gin

g f

rom

th

e so

ilfr

om

th

ose

car

ried

in w

ith

flo

od

wat

ers.

Pass

ive

sam

plin

g t

ech

niq

ue.

Use

ful i

n c

on

jun

ctio

n w

ith

dip

net

tin

g t

o t

arg

etin

vert

ebra

te c

olo

nis

ers

ensu

rin

g a

co

mp

lete

asse

ssm

ent

of

spec

ies

div

ersi

ty. D

oes

no

t re

qu

ire

spec

ialis

t eq

uip

men

t an

d is

easy

to

sam

ple

.

Oth

er s

tud

ies

usi

ng

tec

hn

iqu

eR

efer

to

Ref

eren

ces

69 35, 6

5, 7

0

48

71, 7

0

Wh

at is

yo

ur

focu

s /

qu

esti

on

?

Targ

ets

adu

ltm

acro

inve

rteb

rate

s w

ith

ate

rres

tria

l lif

e st

age.

Like

ly t

o c

olle

ct a

ran

ge

of

spec

ies.

Targ

ets

inve

rteb

rate

s th

atem

erg

e fr

om

flo

od

ed s

oils

.

Targ

ets

spec

ies

that

live

in t

he

bo

tto

m o

f th

e w

ater

co

lum

nan

d in

th

e se

dim

ent.

Dis

adva

nta

ges

Do

es n

ot

catc

h la

rval

sta

ges

or

inve

rteb

rate

s o

ccu

pyi

ng

th

ew

ater

co

lum

n.

Do

es n

ot

catc

h e

mer

gen

t st

age

inve

rteb

rate

s. T

he

tech

niq

ue

use

d f

or

dip

pin

g m

ay in

flu

ence

the

typ

es o

f in

vert

ebra

tes

colle

cted

.

Lab

bas

ed m

on

ito

rin

g, n

ot

exp

ose

d t

o n

atu

rally

var

iab

leco

nd

itio

ns

eg t

emp

erat

ure

,fl

oo

dw

ater

s, e

xter

nal

ly s

ou

rced

inve

rteb

rate

s.

Dif

ficu

lt t

o q

uan

tify

abu

nd

ance

. Sam

ple

r to

be

pu

tin

wet

lan

d 6

wee

ks p

rio

r to

colle

ctio

n (

limit

s m

on

ito

rin

gfr

equ

ency

). N

eed

to

en

sure

that

wat

er le

vels

do

no

t re

ced

ean

d e

xpo

se s

ub

stra

te s

amp

ler.

Surv

ey m

eth

od

(mac

ro-

inve

rteb

rate

s)

Emer

gen

t tr

aps

* D

ip n

et (

250µ

mm

esh

siz

e)Te

chn

iqu

e 13

, 14

Flo

od

ing

so

ilco

llect

ed f

rom

tem

po

rary

wet

lan

ds

Sub

stra

te s

amp

ler

* R

eco

mm

end

ed s

urv

ey m

eth

od

Page 181: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 175

The following text is taken from notes developed by the Aquatic Ecology and Bio-monitoringgroup, Australian Water Quality Centre.

a. Sample vials (length = 54mm, diameter = 27mm) are tightly packed into a rectangular plasticbox (capacity = 15 L, length = 315mm, width = 240mm). The sub-sampler holds between 99 and103 sample vials. These are held in place with a 315 x 240mm brace made from a section offluorescent light diffuser mesh with 14mm square holes. The sub-sampler is filled with waterabove the level of the brace. The sample is then washed from the sieve into the sub-sampler. Ifthe sample contains a lot of large debris (leaves, bark and twigs) that will not pass through thebrace, it may be necessary to add water to the sub-sampler to ensure all this debris is coveredby water.

b. The lid is then fitted to the sub-sampler and the contents mixed by lifting, shaking and tiltingthe sub-sampler from side to side. Complete inversion is not required and if the brace fitstightly all containers will stay in place. The lid is then removed, the brace taken out and anyalgae / animals / detritus washed from it into the sub-sampler. After all suspended matter hassettled, 13 randomly chosen containers (10% of area) are removed and all macroinvertebratesin these containers are identified and counted.

Method for macroinvertebrate sub-sampling

AIM: To separate the invertebrates from the other material for identification.

• Record the date, site and wetland of jar onto tally sheet.

• On museum paper write wetland name, date and site number to be inserted in plastic vial (thisis where the sort will end up). Put some metho-water mix in this jar.

• Open jar of bugs and residue and decant the metho out of the jar through the funnel coveredin fine mesh (this will ensure that no bugs are lost).

• Rinse the sample two times with water, decanting the excess water through the mesh each time(this is to reduce the smells during the search).

• Fill the sub-sampler with small plastic vials and place the grill on top of the vials.

• Fill the jar with water and pour evenly over the grill in the sub-sampler.

• Wash all residue caught in mesh into sub-sampler.

• Cover the vials in the sub-sampler with water (1-2cm over the grill).

• Shake sub-sampler so that the bugs are evenly distributed throughout.

• Carefully remove the grill and put it aside (to be checked later).

• Take the appropriate number of jars needed in order to select 10% of the sample. Select theserandomly from the sub-sampler and decant the water from each vial (through the mesh).

• Make a record that 10% of the sample has been taken.

• Tip sub-sample onto the white trays. Sort and pick out all bugs (not zooplankton) and make arecord when a bug is taken.

• Repeat this process (of 10% sub-samples) until over 200 bugs are picked out (eg if there are 198bugs from 50% of the sample, you need to count another entire 10%).

Appendix 18 MACROINVERTEBRATE SUB SAMPLING

Page 182: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual176

• In most cases all of the sample will need to be sorted.

• When all jars are taken, you must also check through the water and grill of the sub-sampler.This will = 100 %.

• Insert a % ticket into the jar to indicate how much was sampled.

• If there are many more than 200 bugs, do a final pick which involves picking through the restof the sample to check for any different types of bugs or larger individuals of small bugs thatare present (rarer species or larger individuals of species should be picked out).

• Pick out these odd ones and put them into a separate jar with details about the sample and anote which says “spot check”.

Other recommendations for sub-sampling:

• Always complete a jar by the end of a day’s work (try not to leave them half done) and ifnecessary, clearly label all jars that relate to that sample.

• Never leave bugs or samples without metho / water mixture in them as they will rot overnight.

• Always cover samples when leaving the lab.

• Always store bugs in metho / water mix (metho : water 80:20 mix)

When assessing diversity and abundance, every bug counts. If accidents occur (ie a jar is dropped),retrieve all that can be retrieved and ensure this is recorded.

Appendix 18

Page 183: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 177

Appendix 19 TECHNIQUES FOR SURVEYING VERTEBRATE FAUNA

* R

eco

mm

end

ed s

urv

ey t

ech

niq

ue

Ad

van

tag

es

Low

lab

ou

r d

uri

ng

est

ablis

hm

ent,

rep

eata

ble

su

rvey

tec

hn

iqu

eca

ptu

rin

g s

mal

l mam

mal

s.

Low

lab

ou

r d

uri

ng

est

ablis

hm

ent,

rep

eata

ble

su

rvey

tec

hn

iqu

eca

ptu

rin

g s

mal

l mam

mal

s. T

rig

ger

set

for

ligh

t sp

ecie

s, t

hu

s ca

tch

ing

sm

alle

rsp

ecie

s th

an c

aug

ht

in t

he

Ellio

t tr

aps.

Cat

ches

all

smal

l fau

na

incl

ud

ing

mam

mal

s, r

epti

les

and

am

ph

ibia

ns.

Rep

eata

ble

su

rvey

tec

hn

iqu

e an

d lo

wco

st in

volv

ed in

pu

rch

asin

g t

rap

s.

Cat

ches

med

ium

-siz

ed m

amm

als

no

tca

ug

ht

in o

ther

tra

pp

ing

met

ho

ds

(eg

wat

er r

at, p

oss

um

) an

d la

rge

rep

tile

s.Lo

w la

bo

ur

du

rin

g e

stab

lish

men

t.

Rec

ord

s th

e p

rese

nce

of

cryp

tic

spec

ies.

Es

tab

lish

men

t co

sts

are

low

and

a r

ang

e o

f tu

be

size

s ca

n b

e u

sed

to r

eco

rd a

ran

ge

of

dif

fere

nt

size

dan

imal

s.

Can

acc

ou

nt

for

rare

an

d c

ryp

tic

spec

ies

that

are

dif

ficu

lt o

r to

o b

ig t

otr

ap, o

r ar

e n

ot

attr

acte

d t

o b

ait.

Lo

wco

st in

ter

ms

of

equ

ipm

ent.

Oth

er s

tud

ies

usi

ng

tec

hn

iqu

eR

efer

to

Ref

eren

ces

48, 7

2, 4

7, 1

72 72, 4

8, 4

7, 1

1, 7

2

1, 7

2

1, 7

2

Wh

at is

yo

ur

focu

s /

qu

esti

on

?

Rel

ativ

e ab

un

dan

ces

and

div

ersi

ty o

f sm

all m

amm

als.

Rel

ativ

e ab

un

dan

ces

and

div

ersi

ty o

f sm

all m

amm

als.

Rel

ativ

e ab

un

dan

ces

and

div

ersi

ty o

f re

pti

les

and

mam

mal

s.

Rel

ativ

e ab

un

dan

ces

and

div

ersi

ty o

f m

ediu

m-s

ized

mam

mal

s an

d la

rge

rep

tile

s.

Pres

ence

/ ab

sen

ce o

fsp

ecie

s.

Pres

ence

/ ab

sen

ce o

fsp

ecie

s.

Dis

adva

nta

ges

Exp

ensi

ve t

rap

s w

hic

h d

on

ot

catc

h a

ll sp

ecie

s(e

spec

ially

sm

all s

pec

ies

such

as

the

Plan

igal

e).

Exp

ensi

ve t

rap

s w

hic

h d

on

ot

catc

h a

ll sp

ecie

s(e

spec

ially

larg

er s

pec

ies)

.

Lab

ou

r in

ten

sive

to

esta

blis

h, e

spec

ially

infl

oo

dp

lain

cla

yco

nd

itio

ns.

Exp

ensi

ve t

rap

s w

hic

h d

on

ot

catc

h a

ll sp

ecie

s.

Iden

tifi

cati

on

of

hai

r w

illn

eed

to

be

un

der

take

nb

y an

exp

ert.

No

t re

pea

tab

le a

nd

no

tal

way

s a

con

sist

ent

effo

rt.

Surv

ey m

eth

od

(Mam

mal

s an

dR

epti

les)

* El

liot

trap

sTe

chn

iqu

e 15

,16

*Sh

erm

an t

rap

sTe

chn

iqu

e 15

,16

* Pi

tfal

l lin

esTe

chn

iqu

e 15

,16

* C

age

trap

sTe

chn

iqu

e 15

,16

Hai

r tu

bes

Ob

serv

atio

ns

Page 184: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual178

Appendix 20 TECHNIQUES FOR SURVEYING WATER BIRDS

* R

eco

mm

end

ed s

urv

ey m

eth

od

Ad

van

tag

es

Rap

id o

vera

ll as

sess

men

t o

f w

ater

bir

d n

um

ber

s. S

uit

able

in a

reas

of

op

en w

ater

wh

ere

sub

mer

ged

veg

etat

ion

is t

he

mai

n h

abit

at t

ype.

Det

ects

cry

pti

c an

din

con

spic

uo

us

spec

ies

and

acc

ura

tely

rec

ord

s to

tal

nu

mb

ers

of

bir

ds.

Met

ho

d c

an a

lso

be

use

d f

or

bu

sh b

ird

s.

The

stan

dar

dm

eth

od

use

d f

or

Bir

d A

tlas

an

d s

o c

anb

e in

corp

ora

ted

into

oth

er s

uch

dat

abas

es.

Tech

niq

ue

can

be

use

d in

sm

all (

sin

gle

tran

sect

) o

r la

rge

wet

lan

ds

(sev

eral

tran

sect

s). C

an b

e u

sed

in a

ran

ge

of

hab

itat

typ

es, e

g o

pen

wat

er a

nd

emer

gen

t ve

get

atio

n.

Oth

er s

tud

ies

usi

ng

tec

hn

iqu

e

56 48 80

Wh

at is

yo

ur

focu

s /

qu

esti

on

?

Rel

ativ

e ab

un

dan

ces

and

div

ersi

ty o

f w

ater

bir

ds.

Rel

ativ

e ab

un

dan

ces

and

div

ersi

ty o

f b

ird

s.

Rel

ativ

e ab

un

dan

ces

and

div

ersi

ty o

f w

ater

bir

ds.

Dis

adva

nta

ges

Wo

n’t

det

ect

cryp

tic

spec

ies,

no

t a

suit

able

tech

niq

ue

in t

all

veg

etat

ive

hab

itat

typ

es(e

g e

mer

gen

t sp

ecie

s).

This

met

ho

d w

ork

s b

ette

rw

ith

van

tag

e p

oin

ts.

Tim

e co

nsu

min

g m

eth

od

to u

se t

o c

ove

r h

abit

ats

in w

etla

nd

s. M

ore

suit

able

fo

r te

rres

tria

lb

ird

s.

Can

be

a d

iffi

cult

tech

niq

ue

bec

ause

car

en

eed

s to

be

take

n n

ot

tosc

are

the

bir

ds

wh

ileco

mp

leti

ng

tra

nse

cts.

Surv

ey m

eth

od

(Bir

ds)

* Fi

xed

are

a se

arch

Fixe

d p

erio

d s

earc

h

Bir

d t

ran

sect

s(w

alki

ng

, can

oei

ng

etc.

).

Page 185: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 179

Techniques 17,18, 19

Data recording – Water bird survey data sheet

This data sheet should be used with a site description data sheet (Appendix 3).

Site name: Use the standard method for allocating the site numbers. Fill in the first three lettersof the wetland name, and the site code consisting of four numbers.

Wetland name: Record the full name of the wetland in which you are working. Also, allocate athree letter camp name based on the local property name (generally used for wetlands), a nearbyprominent feature or the map sheet name. For example, the camp name for Black StumpWetland would be recorded as BLA = Black Stump Wetland.

Date: Use DD/MM/YY format.

Observers: Record three initials from each observer.

Time start: Record the time the count started in 24-hour time eg 08:30.

Time End: Record the time the count finished in 24-hour time eg 20:00.

Water Depth/Weather: Insert relevant information that best describes conditions on the day ofthe survey. Record water depth from the permanent gauge board or marker (as per technique 8,Appendix 13). If not present, estimate the depth of the majority of the wetland area. Make noteof whether the water levels in your wetland are increasing or decreasing at the time of thesurvey.

Number: A list of common wetland bird species is provided.Next to each species observed record total number of individual birds seen in the wetland.

Use the codes on the next page to record the following information (adapted from Owens 2000):

Method: Generally birds will be observed (code = 6). However, you may also note a speciespresence by listening for its unique calls. If you hear a bird, try hard to observe it, and only recordit as ‘heard’ (code = 7) if you are positive of its identification. If you only hear the bird and it isdifficult to determine the ‘number observed’ and ‘strata’, leave these fields blank.

Strata/Macrohabitat/Microhabitat: ‘Strata’ refers to the height the bird was observed at, whilemacro and microhabitat refer to the habitat the bird is using within the wetland. For example,birds observed swimming on the surface of the wetland would be recorded as‘Strata/Macrohabitat/Microhabitat’ = 34/17/29 = <0.5m/on ground/on surface of dam or pool.These codes would need to be changed if a bird was flying over or roosting in surroundingvegetation.

Breeding: Record the breeding condition of the birds surveyed by allocating the appropriatebreeding code.

Appendix 21 WATER BIRD MONITORING

Page 186: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

GR

EBES

Litt

le G

reb

e T

ach

ybap

tus

fufo

colli

sA

ust

ralia

n G

reb

e T

ach

ybap

tus

no

vaeh

olla

nd

iae

Gre

at C

rest

ed G

reb

e P

od

icep

s cr

ista

tus

PELI

CA

NS

& C

OR

MO

RA

NTS

Au

stra

lian

Pel

ican

Pe

leca

nu

s co

nsp

icill

atu

sG

reat

Co

rmo

ran

t P

hal

acro

cora

x ca

rbo

Litt

le B

lack

Co

rmo

ran

t P

hal

acro

cora

x su

lcir

ost

ris

Pied

Co

rmo

ran

t P

hal

acro

cora

x va

riu

sLi

ttle

Pie

d C

orm

ora

nt

Ph

alac

roco

rax

mel

ano

leu

cos

Au

stra

lian

Dar

ter

An

hin

ga

no

vaeh

olla

nd

iae

BIT

TER

NS,

HER

ON

S &

EG

RET

SW

hit

e-n

ecke

d H

ero

n

Ard

ea p

acif

ica

Gre

at (

Larg

e) E

gre

t A

rdea

alb

aIn

term

edia

te E

gre

t A

rdea

inte

rmed

iaW

hit

e-fa

ced

Her

on

A

rdea

no

vaeh

olla

nd

iae

Litt

le E

gre

t A

rdea

gar

zett

aR

ufo

us

Nig

ht-

her

on

N

ycti

cora

x ca

led

on

icu

sA

ust

ralia

n B

itte

rn

Bo

tau

rus

po

icilo

pti

lus

IBIS

ES &

SPO

ON

BIL

LSA

ust

ralia

n Ib

is

Thre

skio

rnis

mo

lucc

aSt

raw

-nec

ked

Ibis

Th

resk

iorn

is s

pin

ico

llis

Glo

ssy

Ibis

Th

resk

iorn

is f

alci

nel

lus

Ro

yal S

po

on

bill

Pl

atal

ea r

egia

Yel

low

-bill

ed S

po

on

bill

Pl

atal

ea f

lavi

pes

GEE

SE, D

UC

KS

& S

WA

NS

Bla

ck S

wan

C

ygn

us

atra

tus

Frec

kled

Du

ck

Stic

ton

etta

nae

vosa

Au

stra

lian

Sh

eld

uck

Ta

do

rna

tad

orn

oid

esG

rey

Teal

A

nas

gra

cilis

Ch

estn

ut

Teal

A

nas

cas

tan

eaPa

cifi

c B

lack

Du

ck

An

as s

up

erci

liosa

Au

stra

lasi

an S

ho

vele

r A

nas

rh

ynch

oti

sH

ard

hea

d

Ath

ya a

ust

ralis

Au

stra

lian

Wo

od

Du

ck

Ch

eno

net

ta ju

bat

aB

lue-

bill

ed D

uck

O

xyu

ra a

ust

ralis

Mu

sk D

uck

B

iziu

ra lo

bat

a

HA

WK

S, E

AG

LES

& F

ALC

ON

SW

his

tlin

g K

ite

Milv

us

sph

enu

rus

Wh

ite-

bel

lied

Sea

Eag

le

Hal

iaee

tus

leu

cog

aste

rSw

amp

Har

rier

C

ircu

s ap

pro

xim

ans

Pere

gri

ne

Falc

on

Fa

lco

per

egri

nu

s

CR

AN

ESB

rolg

a G

rus

rub

icu

nd

a

Snip

es, R

ails

, Cra

kes

& C

oo

tsLa

tham

’s S

nip

e G

allin

ago

har

dw

icki

iB

uff

-ban

ded

Rai

l R

allu

s p

hili

pp

ensi

sSp

otl

ess

Cra

ke

Porz

ana

tab

uen

sis

Bai

llon

’s C

rake

Po

rzan

a p

usi

llaA

ust

ralia

n S

po

tted

Cra

ke

Porz

ana

flu

min

eaD

usk

y M

oo

rhen

G

allin

ula

ten

ebro

saB

lack

-tai

led

Nat

ive-

hen

G

allin

ula

ven

tral

isPu

rple

Sw

amp

hen

Po

rph

yrio

po

rph

yrio

Eura

sian

Co

ot

Fu

lica

atra

SHO

REB

IRD

SW

hit

e-h

ead

ed S

tilt

H

iman

top

us

leu

coce

ph

alu

sB

and

ed S

tilt

C

lad

orh

ynch

us

leu

coce

ph

alu

sR

ed-n

ecke

d A

voce

t R

ecu

rvir

ost

ra n

ova

eho

llan

dia

eA

ust

ralia

n P

rati

nco

le

Stili

a is

abel

laM

aske

d L

apw

ing

V

anel

lus

mile

sB

and

ed L

apw

ing

V

anel

lus

tric

olo

rC

om

mo

n G

reen

shan

k T

rin

ga

neb

ula

ria

Red

-cap

ped

Plo

ver

Ch

arad

riu

s ru

fica

pill

us

Bla

ck-f

ron

ted

Plo

ver

Els

eyo

rnis

mel

ano

ps

Red

-kn

eed

Do

tter

el

Eryt

hro

go

nys

cin

ctu

sM

arsh

San

dp

iper

Tr

ing

a st

agn

atili

sW

oo

d S

and

pip

er

Tan

ellu

s g

lare

ola

Red

-nec

ked

Sti

nt

Cal

idri

s ru

fico

llis

Shar

p-t

aile

d S

and

pip

er

Cal

idri

s ac

um

inat

aC

url

ew S

and

pip

er

Cal

idri

s fe

rru

gin

ea

GU

LLS

& T

ERN

SSi

lver

Gu

ll L

aru

s n

ova

eho

llan

dia

eW

his

kere

d T

ern

C

hili

do

nia

s h

ybri

du

sG

ull-

bill

ed T

ern

G

elo

chel

ido

n n

iloti

caC

asp

ian

Ter

n

Ch

ilid

on

ias

leu

cop

tera

AD

DIT

ION

AL

SPEC

IES

Site

Nam

e

Wet

land

Dat

e

Obs

erve

rs

D

D

M

M

YY

Tim

e: s

tart

T

ime:

end

Wat

er d

epth

Wea

ther

con

ditio

ns

Ap

pen

dix

21

T

ech

niq

ues

17,

18,

19

WA

TE

R B

IRD

MO

NIT

OR

ING

Pag

e __

_ of

___

Sp

ecie

s N

ame

Nu

mb

erM

eth

od

Str

ata

Mac

roM

icro

Bre

edin

gS

pec

ies

Nam

eN

um

ber

Met

ho

dS

trat

aM

acro

Mic

roB

reed

ing

180

Page 187: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

GR

EBES

Litt

le G

reb

e T

ach

ybap

tus

fufo

colli

sA

ust

ralia

n G

reb

e T

ach

ybap

tus

no

vaeh

olla

nd

iae

Gre

at C

rest

ed G

reb

e P

od

icep

s cr

ista

tus

PELI

CA

NS

& C

OR

MO

RA

NTS

Au

stra

lian

Pel

ican

Pe

leca

nu

s co

nsp

icill

atu

sG

reat

Co

rmo

ran

t P

hal

acro

cora

x ca

rbo

Litt

le B

lack

Co

rmo

ran

t P

hal

acro

cora

x su

lcir

ost

ris

Pied

Co

rmo

ran

t P

hal

acro

cora

x va

riu

sLi

ttle

Pie

d C

orm

ora

nt

Ph

alac

roco

rax

mel

ano

leu

cos

Au

stra

lian

Dar

ter

An

hin

ga

no

vaeh

olla

nd

iae

BIT

TER

NS,

HER

ON

S &

EG

RET

SW

hit

e-n

ecke

d H

ero

n

Ard

ea p

acif

ica

Gre

at (

Larg

e) E

gre

t A

rdea

alb

aIn

term

edia

te E

gre

t A

rdea

inte

rmed

iaW

hit

e-fa

ced

Her

on

A

rdea

no

vaeh

olla

nd

iae

Litt

le E

gre

t A

rdea

gar

zett

aR

ufo

us

Nig

ht-

her

on

N

ycti

cora

x ca

led

on

icu

sA

ust

ralia

n B

itte

rn

Bo

tau

rus

po

icilo

pti

lus

IBIS

ES &

SPO

ON

BIL

LSA

ust

ralia

n Ib

is

Thre

skio

rnis

mo

lucc

aSt

raw

-nec

ked

Ibis

Th

resk

iorn

is s

pin

ico

llis

Glo

ssy

Ibis

Th

resk

iorn

is f

alci

nel

lus

Ro

yal S

po

on

bill

Pl

atal

ea r

egia

Yel

low

-bill

ed S

po

on

bill

Pl

atal

ea f

lavi

pes

GEE

SE, D

UC

KS

& S

WA

NS

Bla

ck S

wan

C

ygn

us

atra

tus

Frec

kled

Du

ck

Stic

ton

etta

nae

vosa

Au

stra

lian

Sh

eld

uck

Ta

do

rna

tad

orn

oid

esG

rey

Teal

A

nas

gra

cilis

Ch

estn

ut

Teal

A

nas

cas

tan

eaPa

cifi

c B

lack

Du

ck

An

as s

up

erci

liosa

Au

stra

lasi

an S

ho

vele

r A

nas

rh

ynch

oti

sH

ard

hea

d

Ath

ya a

ust

ralis

Au

stra

lian

Wo

od

Du

ck

Ch

eno

net

ta ju

bat

aB

lue-

bill

ed D

uck

O

xyu

ra a

ust

ralis

Mu

sk D

uck

B

iziu

ra lo

bat

a

HA

WK

S, E

AG

LES

& F

ALC

ON

SW

his

tlin

g K

ite

Milv

us

sph

enu

rus

Wh

ite-

bel

lied

Sea

Eag

le

Hal

iaee

tus

leu

cog

aste

rSw

amp

Har

rier

C

ircu

s ap

pro

xim

ans

Pere

gri

ne

Falc

on

Fa

lco

per

egri

nu

s

CR

AN

ESB

rolg

a G

rus

rub

icu

nd

a

Snip

es, R

ails

, Cra

kes

& C

oo

tsLa

tham

’s S

nip

e G

allin

ago

har

dw

icki

iB

uff

-ban

ded

Rai

l R

allu

s p

hili

pp

ensi

sSp

otl

ess

Cra

ke

Porz

ana

tab

uen

sis

Bai

llon

’s C

rake

Po

rzan

a p

usi

llaA

ust

ralia

n S

po

tted

Cra

ke

Porz

ana

flu

min

eaD

usk

y M

oo

rhen

G

allin

ula

ten

ebro

saB

lack

-tai

led

Nat

ive-

hen

G

allin

ula

ven

tral

isPu

rple

Sw

amp

hen

Po

rph

yrio

po

rph

yrio

Eura

sian

Co

ot

Fu

lica

atra

SHO

REB

IRD

SW

hit

e-h

ead

ed S

tilt

H

iman

top

us

leu

coce

ph

alu

sB

and

ed S

tilt

C

lad

orh

ynch

us

leu

coce

ph

alu

sR

ed-n

ecke

d A

voce

t R

ecu

rvir

ost

ra n

ova

eho

llan

dia

eA

ust

ralia

n P

rati

nco

le

Stili

a is

abel

laM

aske

d L

apw

ing

V

anel

lus

mile

sB

and

ed L

apw

ing

V

anel

lus

tric

olo

rC

om

mo

n G

reen

shan

k T

rin

ga

neb

ula

ria

Red

-cap

ped

Plo

ver

Ch

arad

riu

s ru

fica

pill

us

Bla

ck-f

ron

ted

Plo

ver

Els

eyo

rnis

mel

ano

ps

Red

-kn

eed

Do

tter

el

Eryt

hro

go

nys

cin

ctu

sM

arsh

San

dp

iper

Tr

ing

a st

agn

atili

sW

oo

d S

and

pip

er

Tan

ellu

s g

lare

ola

Red

-nec

ked

Sti

nt

Cal

idri

s ru

fico

llis

Shar

p-t

aile

d S

and

pip

er

Cal

idri

s ac

um

inat

aC

url

ew S

and

pip

er

Cal

idri

s fe

rru

gin

ea

GU

LLS

& T

ERN

SSi

lver

Gu

ll L

aru

s n

ova

eho

llan

dia

eW

his

kere

d T

ern

C

hili

do

nia

s h

ybri

du

sG

ull-

bill

ed T

ern

G

elo

chel

ido

n n

iloti

caC

asp

ian

Ter

n

Ch

ilid

on

ias

leu

cop

tera

AD

DIT

ION

AL

SPEC

IES

Site

Nam

e

Wet

land

Dat

e

Obs

erve

rs

D

D

M

M

YY

Tim

e: s

tart

T

ime:

end

Wat

er d

epth

Wea

ther

con

ditio

ns

Ap

pen

dix

21

T

ech

niq

ues

17,

18,

19

WA

TE

R B

IRD

MO

NIT

OR

ING

Pag

e __

_ of

___

Sp

ecie

s N

ame

Nu

mb

erM

eth

od

Str

ata

Mac

roM

icro

Bre

edin

gS

pec

ies

Nam

eN

um

ber

Met

ho

dS

trat

aM

acro

Mic

roB

reed

ing

1

1

EX

AM

PL

E

1O.O

OO9

.OO

O.5

mfi

ne/s

light

nor

ther

ly b

reez

e, 2

O% c

loud

RJ

J

B L

A

O 1

O

OBl

ack

Stum

p

256

34

1729

3O

63

417

29

1O6

34

1729

5O

63

417

292

16

36

1728

O 9

O

1

O 3

181

Page 188: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual182

(a)

ME

TH

OD

1 =

pit

2 =

Elli

ott

3 =

har

p tr

ap

4

= m

ist

net

5

= c

aptu

red

whi

le f

orag

ing

6 =

obs

erve

d7

= h

eard

8 =

nes

t9

= e

ggs

10 =

ske

leto

n/fe

athe

rs11

= d

ropp

ings

12 =

oth

er (

in c

omm

ents

)13

= d

iggi

ngs

14 =

cag

e tr

ap15

= s

een

whi

le s

potli

ghtin

g16

= h

eard

whi

le s

potli

ghtin

g17

= t

rack

s18

= r

oadk

ill21

= s

hot

CO

DE

S

17 =

on

grou

nd18

= o

ver

cano

py19

= o

verh

ead

21 =

in s

oil,

unde

r lo

g22

= b

ark,

dea

d tr

ee23

= u

nder

leaf

litte

r24

= in

soi

l, un

der

leaf

litte

r25

= in

ter

mite

mou

nds

26 =

und

er p

lant

s on

gro

und

27 =

und

er p

lant

s on

litte

r28

= o

ver

dam

/poo

l29

= o

n su

rfac

e of

dam

/poo

l30

= a

t ca

nopy

hei

ght

31 =

und

er c

anop

y he

ight

32 =

oth

er (

put

in c

omm

ents

)

(c)

BR

EE

DIN

G C

OD

E

1 =

mat

ing

2 =

nes

t bu

ildin

g3

= n

est

with

egg

s

4 =

nes

t w

ith y

oung

5 =

dep

ende

nt y

oung

(b)

ST

RA

TA/M

AC

RO

HA

BIT

AT

/ MIC

RO

HA

BIT

AT

ST

RA

TA

34 =

<0.

5m35

= 0

.5m

-5.0

m36

= >

5.0m

MA

CR

OH

AB

ITA

T

16 =

Shr

ub m

ulti-

stem

med

woo

dy p

lant

<5m

17 =

On

grou

nd33

= T

ree

sing

le-s

tem

med

woo

dy p

lant

>5m

MIC

RO

HA

BIT

AT

1 =

und

er r

ocks

2 =

on

rock

s3

= a

roun

d ro

cks

4

= u

nder

log

5

= o

n lo

g6

= in

log

7 =

tre

e ho

llow

8 =

loos

e ba

rk,

live

tree

9 =

fol

iage

10 =

in le

af li

tter

11 =

in b

urro

w12

= o

n te

rmite

mou

nd13

= c

anop

y14

= u

pper

bra

nche

s15

= lo

wer

bra

nche

s

Page 189: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 183

Techniques 20 and 21

Data recording – Frog monitoring data sheet

This data sheet should be used with a site description data sheet (Appendix 3).

Site name: Use the standard method to allocate site numbers.

Wetland name: Fill in the full name of the wetland in which you are working.

Date: Use DD/MM/YY format.

Observers: Record three initials of each observer.

Starting time: Record the starting time in 24 hour time eg 08:00.

Number of species heard: Identify the number of species heard at your site (ie number of differentcalls).

Total number of frogs: Estimate the total number of frogs at your site.

Comments or Observation: Add any other information useful for your data collection.

Abundances: Record the name of the species (if you know it) and allocate a category that bestdescribes their abundance (one, few, many, lots).

Appendix 22 FROG MONITORING

Page 190: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

184

Site Name Wetland

Date Observers DD MM YY

Time

COMMENTS or OBSERVATION

FROGS HEARD CALLING

Indicate your estimate of the frogs you heard calling. (Also indicate if you heard no frogs)

How many types of frog did you hear calling?

What was the total number of frogs you heard calling?

Appendix 22 FROG MONITORING Page ___ of ___

Techniques 20, 21

ABUNDANCE

Species Name

One

Few (2-9)

Many (10-15)

Lots (>50)

Page 191: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

185

Site Name Wetland

Date Observers DD MM YY

Time

COMMENTS or OBSERVATION

FROGS HEARD CALLING

Indicate your estimate of the frogs you heard calling. (Also indicate if you heard no frogs)

How many types of frog did you hear calling?

What was the total number of frogs you heard calling?

Appendix 22 FROG MONITORING Page ___ of ___

Techniques 20, 21

ABUNDANCE

Species Name

One

Few (2-9)

Many (10-15)

Lots (>50)

EXAMPLE

1O:OO

2

3O

1 1

K L G P J L

B L A O 1 O O Black Stump Wetland

– Litoria peronii heard calling from red gums approx. 2O m from site

– Crinia parinsignifera heard calling fromsedges at edge of wetland very close to site BLA O1

Litoria Criniaperonii parinsignifera

O 9 O 1 O 3

Page 192: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual186

Abiotic - non-living factors of an ecosystem (for example, soil or water).Adaptive management - a management strategy that involves identifying the causes of a

problem, trying a management approach, monitoring the outcomes, learning from theirsuccess or failure and adapting management accordingly. 4

Adaptive management model - conceptual model of how the adaptive management processoccurs. 4

Aestivate - dormant or torpid state (hibernation). 73

Anoxic - zero oxygen conditions.Australian Height Datum (AHD) - measurement used along the river to show the height of

the river relative to sea level.Algae - aquatic non-vascular plant (without veins).Assemblage - a group of species that are recorded together (in a habitat or specific area) but

are not necessarily interacting. 4

Backwater curve – graphs available from DWLBC showing how River Murray water levelschange under various flow conditions based on distance from the nearest downstream lock.

Biotic - all life or living organisms in an ecosystem (for example, plants and fish). 73

Benthic - bottom of a wetland or water body (for example, bottom dwelling).41

Biofilms - slimy growths of algae and bacteria that are visible on submerged wood, aquaticplants and other surfaces.

Carnivore - flesh eating. 41

Colonisation - the successful invasion of a new habitat by a species. 73

Community - an assemblage of species interacting with each other. 4

Conductivity (EC) - a measure of the ease with which an electrical current will pass through asolution. For a simple sodium chloride (saltwater) solution, there is a direct relationshipbetween electrical conductivity and salinity. Most natural waters have a complex mix of ions(in addition to sodium chloride). However, electrical conductivity is seen as a useful measureof total solute concentration.74 Units of electrical conductivity are referred to as EC units.The actual units for EC are microsiemens per centimetre (µS/cm-1)

Controlled - repeated surveys undertaken at similar sites that will and will not be affected bymanagement, often used in experimental design to separate natural fluctuations within asystem from the management actions.

Cryptic - any species that would otherwise be hard to detect, eg low mobility, don’t go into traps,rarely observed etc.

Culm - jointed stem of grasses. 75

Cumulative - growing in amount, strength or effect, for example, after several changes towetland management the responses observed are thought to be a result of severalmanagement events.

Detritivore - an organism feeding on detritus. 41

Detritus - fragmented particles of organic matter derived from the breakdown of plant andanimal remains. 41

Distal - gradual changes within an environment (eg distal cues for carp breeding).Drawdown - the process where a wetland or body of water is drained or evaporated.Dry wetland bed plants - plants that live on damp mud and colonise the mud flats that are

exposed once the water level in the wetland is drawn down, for example, knot weed(Persicaria spp.) and common sneeze weed (Centipedia spp.).

Glossary

Page 193: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 187

Elevation gradient - the range of elevations recorded in a wetland. Ephemeral - containing water at rare or irregular times. 4

Emergent plants - plant species that must maintain at least some of their leaves and stemsabove the surface of the water to survive–for example, bulrush (Typha spp.), spiny sedge(Cyperus gymnocaulos) and three cornered bulrush (Bolboschoenus caldwellii). In terrestrialenvironments, emergent refers to plants that extend above the majority of the overstoreycanopy.

Establishment - the successful growth and reproduction of a plant/animal species. 73

Extant - living at the present time. 73

Extirpation - loss, totally destroyed. 73

Fecundity - the potential of an organism to reproduce. 73

Flood duration - the length of a flood period.Floodplain - an area of relatively flat land covered by water during a major flood.76

Freshwater lens - layer of fresh groundwater under dry wetlands that is above the regionalgroundwater.

Frequency - the number of occasions that a given species occurs in a series of samples. 73

Functional feeder group - a category assigned to aquatic invertebrates to describe the majortype of food they eat. 4

Fyke - type of net used for fishing, consisting of five hoops and three internal funnel traps with aleader to direct fish into the net.

Germination - the commencement of growth of a propagule or bud 73.Groundwater - water that is below the surface of the land.Groundwater intrusion - the place where water occurring below the surface comes to the

surface.Herbland - Area where herbaceous species grow (non-woody plants).Homogenous- having similarities, eg an area of vegetation that is similar in species composition

and abundance is considered homogenous.Hydrology - the scientific study of surface and subsurface water. 4

Invertebrate - animal without a backbone (including macroinvertebrates and microinvertebrateswhich are classified according to their size range).

Larva(e) - an early or immature development stage of an organism. 41.Littoral - edge or shallow area of a water body. 4

Lock - enclosed area of river close to a weir with gates on either end which are manipulated toraise or lower boats from one level of the river to another. 76

Macroinvertebrates - an animal without a backbone that is visible to the naked eye andretained in a 500µm (usually 1-2mm in length). 4

Macrophytes - large plants, represented in freshwaters by submerged, floating and emergentplants. 4

Mean - average, equal to the sum of observations divided by the number of observations. 73

Microhabitats - a small, specialised habitat. 73

Microbial colonisation - the act of colonisation of a surface or substratum by microbes.NTU - Nephelometric Turbidity Unit, a measure of turbidity based on light transmission through

water. (nephelos=cloud) 4

Nymph - juvenile, sexually immature stage of certain insects. 40

Omnivore - organisms that eat both flesh and plants. 41

Otolith - ear bones of fish. 77

Glossary

Page 194: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

Oviposit - the process of depositing eggs. 73

Parameters – variables measured to describe a site (eg plant species, salinity).Pelagic - open water areas; can also be defined as actively swimming. 4

Photo-period (photoperiodism) - the response of an organism to periodic, often rhythmicchanges either in the intensity of light, or to the relative length of day. Many activities (egbreeding, feeding and migration) are seasonal and determined by photoperiodism 78.

Photosynthesis - the process whereby plants and algae use solar energy, water and carbondioxide to generate organic molecules.4

Phytoplankton - the photosynthetic plankton (algae and Cyanobacteria) 4.Piezometer – a device used to monitor groundwater, generally made of PVC pipe with end caps

to insert into the ground.Planktonic algae - algae in the water column that drifts with water movement.Proximal - rapid changes to an environment (for example, proximal cues for carp breeding).Primary producers - the first organisms to fix carbon into organic matter, usually via

photosynthesis (eg plants). 4

Pupa(e) – the transformation stage between larvae and adult in the life cycle of an insect. 41

Quadrat - a square sampling area used to survey vegetation. 60

Quadrant - smaller section of a quadrat.Quantify - to accurately measure without bias or opinion (for example, to count or measure).Recruitment - the influx of new members into a population either by immigration or

reproduction. 73

Regime - pattern - used to describe a pattern of management (eg drying or re-filling).Replicate – repeated samples at the same site.Riparian vegetation - the group of species that fringe the wetland basin and have a low

tolerance for extended periods of inundation – for example, red gums (Eucalyptuscamaldulensis) and lignum (Muehlenbeckia florulenta).

Riparian zone - land which adjoins, directly influences or is influenced by a body of water. 4

Root zone - the area in the soil where plant roots are located.Running ripe - the time in the life cycle of a fish just prior to reproductive activity, when eggs

or milk can be expelled readily from the fish.Salinisation - the process by which soluble salts accumulate in the soil. 73

Sample – a subset of the population of individuals that are counted when it is not possible tocount all of these individuals.

Seed bank – a reserve of dormant seeds in the soil.Seine net - a net commonly used in the active sampling of fish populations, which can be a

range of lengths and mesh sizes. It is a length of net with a weighted rope along thebottom and a floating rope along the top. At both the top and the bottom of the net,ropes extend by a couple of metres so that the operator can hold onto them when draggingit through the water. The net is operated by keeping the weighted rope on the bottom ofthe wetland and the floating rope on the top of the water.

Shrimp trap - a small, rectangular trap most commonly used for catching shrimps. The shrimptraps have a zipped pocket for the bait, a large zip for emptying the trap and two 5 cm-diameter entrances at either end of the trap where fish can enter and leave the trap freely.This is a passive sampling technique.

Substrate - any object or material upon which an organism grows or is attached (eg soil, logs,rocks, plants). 78

your wetland - monitoring manual188

Glossary

Page 195: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 189

Submerged plants: plants with all parts of the plant below the surface of the water – forexample, ribbon weed (Vallisneria americana) and curly pond weed (Potamogeton crispus). 15

Standard deviation: a measure of spread within a population; the amount of variation aroundthe average. 60

Stratified random sampling – random sampling that is carried out within different areasindependently.

Substrate/substratum - the sediment surface or medium on which an organism attaches itselfto grow or utilise as a food source. 73

Succession - the ecological or seasonal sequence of species within a habitat or community. 73

Taxon (taxa) - a taxonomic group of any rank, including any group of organisms, populations ortaxa considered to be sufficiently distinct from other groups. 73

Threatened species – species that are at risk of extinction, including endangered, vulnerable,rare, and indeterminate species as defined by the World Conservation Union (IUCN).

Trophic web - network of interconnected food chains in a community, through which energy istransferred from one level of the web to the other.41

Turions - starch-filled organ of a plant, also known as winter buds.15,17

Topography: all human-made and natural surface features in a geographic area. 73

Total abundance - the total number of individuals (for example, fish or macroinvertebrates)that were captured during a survey period.

Turbidity - a measure of the scattering of light by suspended particles in water, which can give aquick surrogate measure of the level of suspended solids. It is often used to describe thecloudiness or ‘muddiness’ of water.

Uncontrolled –unrepeated surveys undertaken at similar sites that will not be affected bymanagement.

Unreplicated – unrepeated samples at the same site.Verification – species identification by recognised bodies (eg SA Herbarium or SA Museum).Vegetation zones - areas with distinct communities of vegetation.Water regime - refers to where and how long water is on different parts of a wetland or the

surrounding area. There are five parts to the regime: - the duration or length of time water is on the wetland; - the timing of the water arriving; - how frequently water occurs within a wetland; - the rate of filling; and - the depth of the water.

Weir - a construction across a river used to dam the water, which can be removed at times offlood.76

Weir pool - the body of water found upstream of a weir, created when river water is held back.Zooplankton - planktonic animal life (less than 5mm in freshwater); the animal component of

plankton 41 4.

Glossary

Page 196: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual190

1. Owens H. (2000) Guidelines for vertebrate surveys in South Australia using the biologicalsurvey of South Australia. Owens, H. (ed) National Parks and Wildlife SA, Government ofSouth Australia., Adelaide.http://www.environment.sa.gov.au/biodiversity/pdfs/vertebrate_survey_manual_pdf

2. Heard L. and Channon B. (1997) Guide to a native vegetation survey (agricultural region)using the biological survey of South Australia. Geographic analysis and research unitinformation and data analysis branch department of housing and urban development,Adelaide.http://www.environment.sa.gov.au/biodiversity/pdfs/vertebrate_survey_manual_pdf

3. Tucker P.J., Dominelli S.T., Harper M.J., van der Wielen M. and Siebentritt M. (2002) Yourwetland: Hydrology guidelines River Murray-South Australia. Australian Landscape Trust,Renmark, SA.

4. Boulton A.J. and Brock M.A. (1999) Australian Freshwater Ecology Processes andManagement. Gleneagles Publishing, Glen Osmond SA.

5. Roberts J. and Marston F. (2000) Water regime of wetland and floodplain plants in theMurray-Darling Basin - A source book of ecological knowledge.Technical report,30/00,CSIRO Land and Water, Canberra.

6. Leitch C. (1989) Towards a strategy for managing the flooding of Barmah Forest.Department of Conservation Forests and Lands, Benalla Region.

7. Dexter B.D., Rose H.J. and Davies N. (1986) River regulation and associated forestmanagement problems in the River Murray red gum forests. Aust. For. 49 : (1), 16-27.

8. Simpson D. and Carter J. (1994) Wetlands and floodplain management, workshop program.Department of Environment and Natural Resources, Adelaide.

8a. Goodman T (2003) Guidelines for Developing Wetland Management Plans for the RiverMurray in South Australia. Department of Water Land and Biodiversity Conservation.

9. Rutherfurd I., Jerie K. and Marsh N. (2000) A Rehabilitation Manual for Australian Streams.1:171,CRC for Catchment Hydrology and Land and Water Resources RandD Corporation, .

10. Robinson A.C., Casperson K.D. and Hutchinson M.N. (2000) A list of the vertebrates ofSouth Australia. Department for Environment and Heritage, Adelaide, South Australia.

11. Jessop J.P. (1993) A list of the vascular plants of South Australia. Department ofEnvironment and Land Management, Adelaide, South Australia.

12. Brock M.A. and Casanova M.T. (1997) Plant life at the edge of wetlands: Ecologicalresponses to wetting and drying patterns. Frontiers in Ecology: Building the Links : 181-192.

References

Page 197: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 191

13. Reid M.A. and Brooks J. (1998) Measuring the Effectiveness of Environmental WaterAllocations: Recommendations for the Implementation of Monitoring Programs forAdaptive Hydrological Management of Floodplain Wetlands in the Murray-DarlingBasin.Report for Murray-Darling basin commission project R6050, Monash University andCooperative Research Centre for Freshwater Ecology, Clayton, Victoria.

14. Cunningham G.M., Mulham W.E., Milthorpe P.L. and Leigh J.H. (1992) Plants of WesternNew South Wales. Inkata press, Melbourne.

15. Sainty G.R. and Jacobs S.W.L. (1994) Waterplants in Australia. Sainty and Associates, Sydney.

16. Sainty G.R. and Jacobs S.W.L. (1981) Waterplants of New South Wales. Jeffcoat, K. (ed)Water Resources Commission New South Wales, New South Wales.

17. Jessop J.P. and Toelken H.R. (1986) Flora of South Australia. South Australia GovernmentPrinting Division, Adelaide.

18. Jessop J.P. (1989) A list of the vascular plants of South Australia. Journal Adelaide BotanicGardens 12 : 1-63.

19. Siebentritt M. (in prep) The influence of water regime upon vegetation in Lower RiverMurray wetlands: Implications for restoration. .PhD thesis, Department of EnvironmentalBiology, University of Adelaide.

20. Heard L. pers. com. (2002).

21. Harper M.J. pers. com. (2000)

22. Brock M. (1997) Are there seeds in your wetland? Assessing wetland vegetation. Land andWater Resources Research and Development Corporation.

23. Jolly I.D. and Walker G.R. (1995) A sketch of salt and water movement in the Chowillafloodplain. CSIRO Division of Water Resources, Adelaide.

24. Murray - Darling Basin Commission. (1999) The Salinity Audit of the Murray-Darling Basin,a 100-year perspective 1999. Murray Darling Basin Commission, .

25. Bailey P.C.E. and James K. (2000) Riverine and wetland salinity impacts - assessment ofRandD needs.Occassional Paper, 25/99,Land and Water Resources Research andDevelopment Corporation, Canberra.

26. Jolly I. D. pers. com. (2001)

27. Seekamp J.V. pers. com. (2001).

28. Seekamp J.V. pers. com. (1999).

References

Page 198: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

29. Jolly I. D. pers. com. (2002)

30. Humphries P., King A.J. and Koehn J.D. (1999) Fish, flows and flood plains: Links betweenfreshwater fishes and their environment in the Murray-Darling River system, Australia.Environmental Biology of Fishes 56 : 129-151.

31. McDowall R. (1996) Freshwater Fishes of South-Eastern Australia. Reed Books, Chatswood,NSW.

32. Allen G.R., Midgley S.H. and Allen M. (2002) Field guide to the freshwater fishes ofAustralia. Western Australian Museum, Perth, Western Australia.

33. Hammer M. and Butler G. (2002) Freshwater fishes of the Mt. Lofty Ranges, part B, MurrayDarling Basin in SA. Upper River Torrens Landcare Group inc.

34. Nichols S.L. (in prep) What about the fish?? Management and construction guidelines forimproving fish passage through wetland flow control structures in the lower River Murray,South Australia. Australian Landscape Trust, Renmark, SA.

35. Suter P.J., Goonan P.M., Beer J.A. and Thompson T.B. (1993) A biological and physico-chemical monitoring study of wetlands from the River Murray floodplain in SouthAustralia.Final report, 7/93,Australian Centre for Water Quality Research, Adelaide.

36. Lloyd L. (1986) Distribution and Conservation Status of Small Freshwater Fish in the RiverMurray, South Australia. Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia 2 : (110), 49-57.

37. Wedderburn S. (2000) Habitat and conservation status of small fish in the lower RiverMurray, and a comparison of the Western carp gudgeon (Hypseleotris klunxingeri) and thePlague minnow (Gambusia holbrooki) as larval mosquito predators .Honours thesis,Department of Environmental Biology, University of Adelaide.

38. Harris J.H. and Gehrke P.C. (eds.) (1997) Fish and Rivers in Stress. The NSW Rivers Survey.NSW Fisheries Office of Conservation and the Cooperative Research Centre for FreshwaterEcology, Cronulla, NSW.

39. Suter P.J., Goonan P.M., Neill J.A. and Thompson T.B. (1995) A biological and physico-chemical monitoring study of wetlands from the River Murray floodplain in South Australia:Supplement, October 1992-March 1993. Australian Water Quality Centre, Adelaide.

40. Hawking J.H. and Smith F.J. (1997) Colour guide to invertebrates of Australian inland waters.Co-operative Research Centre for Freshwater Ecology, New South Wales.

41. Ingram B.A., Hawking J.H. and Shiel R.J. (1997) Aquatic Life in Freshwater Ponds: A Guide tothe Identification and Ecology of Life in Aquaculture Ponds and Farm Dams in South EasternAustralia: Co-operative Research Centre for Freshwater Ecology Identification Guide No.9.Co-operative Research Centre for Freshwater Ecology, Albury, NSW.

42. Gooderham J. and Tsyril E. (2002) A guide to freshwater macroinvertebrates of temperateAustralia, CSIRO Publishing.

your wetland - monitoring manual192

References

Page 199: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 193

43. Williams W.D. (1980) Australian freshwater life the invertebrates of Australian inlandwaters. The Macmillan company of Australia Pty. Ltd., Melbourne.

44. Miller, R. 1983, Freshwater invertebrates, Gould League of Victoria, Globe Press, Victoria.

45. Dvorak J. and Best E.P.H. (1982) Macro-invertebrate communities associated with themacrophytes of Lake Vechten: structural and functional relationships. Hydrobiologia 95 :115-126.

46. O’Malley C. and Sheldon F. (eds.) (1990) Chowilla Floodplain biological survey. NatureConservation Society of South Australia Inc. (N.C.S.S.A.).

47. Bignall J.L. (2001) Habitat use and movements of dasyurid marsupials, Planigale gilesi(paucident planigale) ans Smitnthopsis crassicaudata (fat-tailes dunnart) (Marsupial:Dasyridae), Department of Applied and Molecular Ecology, University of Adelaide : 153.

48. Jenkins K.M. and Briggs S.V. (1995) Ecological Management of Lakebed Cropping on theLakes of the Great Anabranch of the Darling River. Final Report, Australian NatureConservation Agency States Co-operative Assistance Program, NSW.

49. Cogger H.G. (2000) Reptiles and Amphibians of Australia. Reed New Holland, Sydney.

50. Menkhorst P. and Knight F. (2001) A Field Guide to the Mammals of Australia. OxfordUniversity Press, Melbourne.

51. Strahn R. (1995) The Mammals of Australia. Reed New Holland, Sydney.

52. Jensen A. (1983) Lake Merreti - An Environmental Baseline Study. Assessments Branch,South Australian Department of Environment and Planning., Adelaide, South Australia.

53. Pringle J.D. (1985) The Waterbirds of Australia. Serventy, V.N. (ed) Angus and Robertsonpublishers, NSW.

54. Morcombe M. (2000) Field Guide to Australian Birds. Steve Parish Publishing Pty. Ltd.,Queensland.

55. Pizzey G. and Knight F. (1997) The Graham Pizzey and Frank Knight Field Guide to theBirds of Australia. Harper Collins Publishers, Australia.

56. Harper M.J. (1990) Waterbird Dynamics at Bool Lagoon, South Australia, 1983-87. Aust.Wildl. Res. 17 : 113-122.

57. Harper M.J. pers. com. (2002)

58. Briggs S.V. and Maher M.T. (1985) Limnological studies of waterfowl habitat in South-western New South Wales. II. Aquatic macrophyte productivity. Australian Journal ofFreshwater Research 36 : 707-15.

References

Page 200: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

59. Robinson M. (2000) A Field Guide to Frogs of Australia, from Port Augusta to Fraser Islandincluding Tasmania. Reed New Holland, Sydney.

60. Dytham C. (1999) Choosing and using statistics: a biologist’s guide. Blackwell Science Ltd,London.

61. Burgman M.A. and Lindenmayer D.B. (1998) Conservation biology for the Australianenvironment. Surrey Beatty and Sons Pty. Ltd., New South Wales.

62. Brower J.E. and Zar J.H. (1982) Field and laboratory methods for general ecology. Wm. C.Brown Company Publishers, United States of America.

63. Siebentritt M. pers. com. (2001)

64. Roberts G. (2001) The earth did move for you!! a change in the map datum has resulted in- Australia effectively moving 200 metres North East. SEGments journal of the ScientificEpedition Group 17 : (3), 8.

65. Tucker P.J. (2002) Your Wetland: Supporting information. Australian Landscape Trust,Renmark, SA.

66. Puckridge J. pers. com. (1998)

67. Scholz O., Gawne B., Ebner B., Ellis I., Betts F. and Meredith S. (1999) The impact of dryingon the ecology of the Menindee Lakes. Technical Report, Cooperative Research Centre forFreshwater Ecology, Canberra.

68. Dominelli S.T. (1999) Advice on fish monitoring techniques, pers. com.

69. Schiller N. (1996) The Ecology of Lower Murray Wetlands in Presence and Absence ofCommon Carp. Honours thesis, Department of Environmental Science and Management,University of Adelaide.

70. Waterwatch. (1996) Waterwatch Manual, Catchment care and water quality monitoring inSouth Australia, A guide for students, teachers and community groups. Waterwatch andDepartment of Environment and Natural Resources, Adelaide.

71. Schultz M. pers. com. (2000).

72. Dominelli S.T. pers. com. (2002)

73. Lincoln R.J., Boxshall G.A. and Clark P.F. (1993) A Dictionary of Ecology, Evolution andSystematics. Cambridge University Press.

74. NPS. (1996) Manual of Wetlands Management. Wetlands Conservation Report Series, 4,Department of Natural Resources Victoria, Melbourne.

your wetland - monitoring manual194

References

Page 201: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual 195

75. Lamp C.A., Forbes S.J. and Cade J.W. (1990) Grasses of temperate Australia. A field guide.Pressley, M. (ed) Inkata Press, Melbourne.

76. Mackay N. and Eastburn D. (1990) The Murray. Murray Darling Basin Commission, Canberra,Australian Capital Territory.

77. Smith B. (1999) Observations on the early life history of carp, (Cyprinus carpio), fecundity,spawning and tolerance of eggs to dehydration and salinity. Honours Thesis, Departmentof Environmental Biology, University of Adelaide.

78. Allaby M. (1999) Dictionary of zoology. Oxford University Press, New York.

79. Briggs S.V. and Thornton S.A., 1995 Management of River Red Gums for waterbird Nesting,Corella Vol. 19/4, p. 132-138.

80. Gell P.A. and Pearce P. (1999) Waterbirds at Lake Cowal New South Wales, Australia:Assemblage shifts over a complete filling and drying cycle. NSWEES Environmental andEducational Services: 39.

References

Page 202: YOUR WETLAND Monitoring manual - … · Cover photo courtesy of Banrock Station/BRL Hardy. 1. ... It covers a brief summary of what the technique offers, ... your wetland - monitoring

your wetland - monitoring manual196